Ar 208d

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE : 00ZAR208D/A1E
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
(AR-208S/AR-208D)
MODEL
CONTENTS
AR-208S AR-208D
[1] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 [2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 [3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 [4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 [5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 [6] COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 [7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 [8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 [9] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 [10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 [11] MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1 [12] USER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1 [13] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1 [14] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 1 [15] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1
Parts marked with are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
SHARP CORPORATION
This document has been published to be used for after sales service only. The contents are subject to change without notice.
CAUTION
This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040 of the CDRH standard and IEC825. This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achieved on the eyes retina, there is the danger of spot damage to the retina. The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time of servicing. 1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged as a unit, not as individual parts. 2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, toner cartridge, and drum cartridge. 3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connected when removing and installing the optical system. 4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch. Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot.
CAUTION
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION, WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
VARO !
AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NKYMTTMLLE LASERSTEILYLLE L KATSO STEESEEN.
VORSICHT
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEFFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG BERBRCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. LASER WAVE LENGTH : 770 795nm Pulse times : 10.24sec Out put power : 0.15mW 0.01mW
ADVARSEL
USYNLIG LASERSTRLNING VED BNING, NR SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDG UDSAETTELSE FOR STRLNING.
VARNING !
OSYNLIG LASERSTRLNING NR DENNA DEL R PPNAD OCH SPRREN R URKOPPLAD. BETRAKTA EJ STRLEN. STRLEN R FARLIG.
At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.57 MILLI-WATT PLUS 20 PCTS and is maintained constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control (APC). Even if the APC circuit fails in operation for some reason, the maximum output power will only be 15 MILLI-WATT 0.1 MICRO-SEC. Giving and accessible emission level of 42 MICRO-WATT which is still-less than the limit of CLASS-1 laser product.
Caution This product contains a low power laser device. To ensure continued safety do not remove any cover or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.
VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KYTTMINEN MUULLA KUIN TSS KYTTOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KYTTJN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTVLLE NKYMTTMLLE LASERSTEILYLLE.
VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVNDS P ANNAT STT N I DENNA BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVNDAREN UTSTTAS FR OSYNLIG LASERSTRLNING, SOM VERSKRIDER GRNSEN FR LASERKLASS 1.
The foregoing is applicable only to the 220V model, 230V model and 240V model.
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
CONTENTS
[1] GENERAL 1. Major functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 2. Note for servicing and handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 [2] SPECIFICATIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. [3] Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPLC printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSPF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-2 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 7. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/document transport (Duplex model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 A. Initial state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 B. Front copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 C. Back copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 8. Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 [8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 1. High voltage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 B. Drum replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 C. Disassembly procedure (Transfer charger unit) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 D. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 E. TC unit cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 F. Charger wire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 2. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 3. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 4. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 5. Tray paper feed/transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 6. Manual paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 D. Pressure plate holder attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 7. Rear frame section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 8. Power section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 9. DV unit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 A. Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 B. DV seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 C. DV blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 D. DV doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 E. DV sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 10. Duplex motor section (AR-208D only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 11. Reverse roller section (AR-208D only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 12. RSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 A. Front cabinet, rear cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 B. Upper door unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 C. Document tray unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 D. Upper door open/close sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 E. Reverse clutch, paper exit roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 F. Drive unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 G. Shutter solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 H. Pickup roller, take-up roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 I. Paper empty sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 J. PS roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 K. Upper transport roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 L. Paper sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 M. Lower transport roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 N. Paper exit sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
CONSUMABLE PARTS 1. Supply list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. SEC/SECL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Production control number (lot No.) identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Toner cartridge replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[4]
EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motors, solenoids and clutch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensors and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[5]
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Copier installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Cautions on handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Checking packed components and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Removing protective packing materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Developer unit installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Toner cartridge installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Loading the paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Power to copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 A. Before installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 B. Installing the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 C. Setting up Button Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 11. Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 A. USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 12. Moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 13. Scanner moisture-proof kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 A. Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 B. Precautions at installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 C. Attachment method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
[6]
COPY PROCESS 1. Functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 2. Outline of print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 3. Actual print process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
[7]
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 1. Outline of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Scanner section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Optical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Laser unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Basic structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Laser beam path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fuser section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Paper feed section and paper transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Paper transport path and general operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. RSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Document transport path and basic composition . . . . . . . . . . C. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. Cases where a document jam is caused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. RSPF open/close detection (book document detection) . . . . 7-1 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-7 7-7 7-7 7-7 7-8 7-8
[9]
ADJUSTMENTS 1. Optical section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Copy density adjustment timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Note for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. Features of copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. Copy density adjustment procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Main charger (Grid bias) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. DV bias check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Duplex adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory for duplex copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode . . . . . . . . . 5. RSPF scan position automatic adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. RSPF mode sub scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Automatic black level correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 9-1 9-3 9-3 9-3 9-4 9-4 9-4 9-5 9-5 9-5 9-5 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-7 9-8
[10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Entering the test command mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Key rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 List of test commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Descriptions of various test commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 A. Trouble codes list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 B. Details of trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
[11] MAINTENANCE 1. Maintenance table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 2. Maintenance display system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 3. Remaining toner indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 [12] USER PROGRAM 1. User programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Copy mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Selecting a setting for a user program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [13] ELECTRICAL SECTION 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 A. Overall block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 2. Signal name list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 [14] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1. MCU PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 2. OPERATION PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 3. ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20 [15] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 1. Initial setting (Serial number setting procedures) . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Download procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Version acquisition procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Installing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 15-1 15-3 15-4 15-5 12-1 12-1 12-2 12-3
[1] GENERAL
1. Major functions
Configurations
Item Model AR-208S AR-208D CPM (Letter) 20 20 SB/ MB MB MB 2 Tray Opt (250) Opt (250) SPF R-SPF Color Scanner (push) GDI printer SPLC E-SORT Duplex Shifter FAX Opt Opt Sharp desk IEEE 1284 USB (2.0Hi) (2.0Hi) RJ45 External NIC Opt Opt
Descriptions of items
CPM: SB/MB: 2 tray: SPF: R-SPF: Color scanner: GDI printer: SPLC: E-SORT: Duplex: Shifter: FAX: Sharpdesk: IEEE1284: USB: RJ45: External NIC: Copy speed (Copies Per Minute) SB = Manual feed single bypass, MB = Manual feed multi bypass Second cassette unit Original feed unit Duplex original feed unit Color scanner function GDI printer function with USB SPLC printer function Electrical sort Auto duplex copy function Job separator function FAX function Scanner utilities Interface port (parallel) Interface port (USB) Interface port (Network) AR-NB2A
(AR-208S/AR-208D)
(Options)
AR-D33
AR-NB2A
Descriptions of table
: Standard provision : No function or no option available Opt: Option
AR-FX13
2. Note for servicing and handling

When the main unit power is repeatedly turned OFF/ON rapidly (for about 1sec), the IC (OA982) on the MCU PWB may malfunction to cause an error (E1-00 Communication error), which does not boot the machine. In case of this error, the blank display is kept for several tens seconds and then "E100" is displayed on the panel display. <Countermeasure> Turn off the power and keep it for more than 10sec. Then turn on the power. When the machine is booted.: There is no problem in the MCU PWB. When the machine is not booted.: The MCU PWB trouble
AR-208S/208D GENERAL 1 - 1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specifications
Item Type Copy system Segment (class) Copier dimensions Weight (Approximately) Desktop Dry, electrostatic Digital personal copier 20-1/2 (W) x 17-5/8 (D) x 14-5/8 (H) (518mm (W) x 445mm (D) x 371mm (H)) 20-1/2 (W) x 17-5/8 (D) x 14-5/8 (H) (518mm (W) x 445mm (D) x 371mm (H)) 43.9lbs.(19.9kg) DV unit is not included. 45.4lbs.(20.6kg)
AR-208S AR-208D AR-208S AR-208D
2. Operation specifications
Paper feed section Section, item Paper feed system Inch Tray paper feed section system Details Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds Remark Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds Remark Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds Remark Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds Remark Paper exit section Originals Exit way Capacity of output tray Original set Max. original size Original kinds Original size detection Scanning system CCD sensor Lighting lamp 1 tray (250 sheets) + multi-bypass (50 sheets) 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape) 15 - 21 lbs. 250 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper User adjustment of paper guide available Max, feedable size: 8-1/2" x 14" / Min, feedable size: 3.87" x 5.83" 15 - 34.5 lbs. 50 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label, Envelop (Single copy) User adjustment of paper guide available A4, B5, A5 (Landscape) 56 - 80g/m2 250 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper User adjustment of paper guide available Max, feedable size: A4 / Min, feedable size: 89 x 140mm 56 - 128g/m2 50 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label, Envelop (Single copy) User adjustment of paper guide available Face down 200 sheets Center Registration (left edge) A4 (8-1/2" x 14") sheet, book None 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp 600 dpi CCFL 560Vrms 2.8W Output: R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / Input: A/D 16 bits (12 bits actual) Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laser 600 dpi OPC (30) 25K Saw-tooth charging with a grid, / (-) scorotron discharge (+) DC corotron system (-) DC corotron system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development system Counter blade system (Counter to rotation)
Multi-bypass paper feed section
AB system
Tray paper feed section
Multi-bypass paper feed section
Optical section
Scanning section
Resolution Type Voltage Power consumption
Output data Writing section Image forming Writing system Laser unit Photoconductor Charger
Developing Cleaning
Resolution Type Life Charging system Transfer system Separation system Developing system Cleaning system
AR-208S/208D SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1
Fusing section
Section, item Fusing system Upper heat roller Lower heat roller Heater lamp
Details Type Type Type Voltage Power consumption Voltage Frequency Max. Average (during copying) Average (stand-by) Pre-heat mode Auto power shut-off mode Heat roller system Teflon roller Silicon rubber roller Halogen lamp 120V 800W 120V Common use for 50 and 60Hz Less than 1000W 380Wh/H 80Wh/H 28Wh/H 12.5W or less
Electrical section
Power source Power consumption
3. Copy performance
Section, item Copy magnification Fixed magnification ratios Zooming magnification ratios Manual steps (manual, photo) Copy speed (CPM) First-copy time *1 (Approximately) Inch system 8-1/2" x 11" (Landscape) AB system A4 (Landscape) AB system B5 (Landscape) Max. continuous copy quantity Void Void area Same size Details 4 Reduction + 3 Enlargement (Inch system: 25, 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200, 400%) (AB system: 25, 50, 70, 86, 100, 141, 200, 400%) 25 - 400% (376 steps in 1% increments) 50 - 200% when using RSPF (151 steps in 1% increments) 5 steps 8.0 seconds (When user program 24 is set to OFF) 10.7 seconds (When user program 24 is set to ON) (paper: A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), exposure mode: AUTO, copy ratio: 100 20
Same size Same size
20 20 99 1 - 4mm 4mm or less 0.5mm or more (per side) 4.5mm or less (total of both sides) same size: 3.0mm or less (OC) / 4mm or less (RSPF) Enlarge: 1.5mm or less (OC) / 3mm or less (RSPF) Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less (OC) / 8mm or less (RSPF) 0 sec. Immediately the ready lamp is lit. 0 sec. Immediately the ready lamp is lit. 0 sec. Jam recovery condition: Recovery time from 60 sec of door open.
Leading edge Trailing edge Side edge void area Leading edge
Image loss
Warm-up time Power save mode reset time Paper jam recovery time
*1: The first-copy time is measured after the power save indicator turns off following power on, using the document glass with the polygon rotating in the copy ready state and "Selection of copy start state" set to ON in the user programs (8-1/2" x 11" (A4), paper fed from paper tray). The first-copy time may vary depending on machine operating conditions and ambient conditions such as temperature.
AR-208S/208D SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 2
4. SPLC printer
Print speed First print time Duplex ROPM CPU Memory Interface Network Emulation MIB support Resolution Supported OS WHQL support Application *1: Engine Resolution *2: Running change Max. 20ppm (Paper size: A4, excluding manual paper feed) * Varies depending on the PC performance. 8 sec. (without data transfer time) Yes (AR-208D only) Yes None 64MB USB2.0 (Hi Speed) Option: Network expansion kit the AR-NB2A SPLC (JBIG GDI) No 600dpi *1 Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, Windows Vista Yes *2 Status window
5. Scan function
Type Scanning system Light source Resolution Originals Output data Scan range Scan speed Protocol Support file format Interface Scanner utility Scan key/lamp Duplex scan Supported OS Void area WHQL supported *1: Running change Flat Bed Color Scanner Document glass / RSPF 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp (1 pcs of CCFL) Optical: 600 x 1200dpi Setting range: 50 - 9600dpi (Preview resolution is fixed at 75dpi) Sheet type / Book type R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / A/D 16bit OC / RSPF: 8.5" (297mm) (L) x 14" (431mm) (W) Original position: Platen: Left center / RSPF: Right center OC / RSPF: Max. 2.88ms/line(Color/Gray scale) TWAIN / WIA (Only XP Vista) / STI RAW / JPEG USB2.0 (Hi Speed data transmission) Button Manager / Sharpdesk / Composer Yes Yes (AR-208D only) Windows 98/Me, 2000 Professional, XP Home Edition / Professional, Vista No Yes *1
6. RSPF
Original capacity Original size Original replacement speed Job speed (Tray1,Landscape) Single copy 50 sheets (56 - 90g/m2) or 6.5mm, 1/4" or less. A4, B5, A5 / 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2" 8-1/2" x 11" about 14 sheets (70%) A4 about 13 sheets (65%) S to S About 14CPM (8-1/2" x 11") About 13CPM (A4) S to D About 10CPM (1 - 30 sheets)(*1) About 5.6CPM (31 sheets ~) D to S About 6CPM D to D About 6CPM (1 - 30 sheets)(*1) About 5.6CPM (31 sheets ~) S to S About 20CPM S to D About 13CPM (1 - 30 sheets)(*1) About 5.6CPM (31 sheets ~) D to S About 16CPM D to D About 13CPM (1 - 30 sheets)(*1) About 5.6CPM (31 sheets ~) Face up 15 - 23.9lbs. (56 - 90g/m2) No Thermal papers, originals with punch holes for files, be used folded paper, transparent originals such as OHP films, stapled or clip used originals with cover up liquid used, Originals with tape sealed, originals with high level frictional coefficient such as photos or catalogs.
Multi copy
Original placement Original weight Mixed feeding Original which cannot
[Conditions] Speed with tray 1, normal size, paper size of 8.5" x 11" (A4), and RSPF. *1: Indicates the speed from 1st to 30th sheet (i.e., 60th surface). AR-208S/208D SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 3
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

1. Supply list
A. SEC/SECL
No. 1 Name Toner cartridge (Black) Developer Content Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g) Polyethylene bag Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g)
10 10 10
Life 80K (8K x 10Pcs) 250K (25K x 10Pcs) 25K
Product name AR-208MT (A4 6% document) AR-208MD
Drum kit
Drum Drum fixing plate
1 1
AR-152DR
Packing form One carton of the AR-208MT includes 10 toner cartridges. One carton of the AR-208MD includes 10 developers. One carton of the collective package includes 10 units of the AR-152DR.
Note: Printing of the master/individual cartons is made in 2 languages, English/French. Packed together with the machine: DR 25K/Developer UN/Process UN
2. Environmental
The environmental conditions for assuring the copy quality and the machine operations are as follows:
(4)
Supply storage condition

Humidity (RH) 90%
(1)
Normal operating condition
Temperature: 20C to 25C Humidity: 65 5%RH
(2)
Acceptable operating condition

Humidity (RH) 85% 60%
5C 45C
20%
3. Production control number (lot No.) identification

20%
<Toner cartridge>
10C 30C 35C
Production month Production day Destination code (Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.) Production place (SOCC: Fixed to B.) End digit of year Version No.
(3)
Transportation condition
Humidity (RH) 90% 60%
<Drum cartridge>
15%
The label on the drum cartridge shows the date of production. (SOCC production)
25C
30C
40C
Production month Production day Destination code (Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.) Production place (SOCC: Fixed to B.) End digit of year Version No.
AR-208S/208D CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1
4) Put Toner unit in a collection bag immediately after removing it from the copier
Production control label attachment position
Note: Never carry exposed Toner unit. Be sure to put it in the collection bag.
Production control label attachment position(*1)
1 The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of a
China product.
<Developer>
Sub lot Production day Production month End digit of year Production place
4. Toner cartridge replacement

1) Open the front and side cabinets of the copier. 2) Keep holding Toner lover, and 3) Carefully pull out Toner unit from the copier.
3 1
AR-208S/208D CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

1. Appearance
RSPF 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Interface
18
12 11 13 14 15 16 17
16
1 4 7 10 13 16
Document glass Paper tray Bypass tray paper guides Document feeder cover Paper output tray Handles
2 5 8 11 14 17
Operation panel Side cover Bypass tray Document feeder tray Paper output tray extension Power cord
3 6 9 12 15 18
Front cover Side cover open button Original guides Exit area Power switch USB connector
2. Internal
Toner cartridge Drum cartridge
2 3
4 5
1 4
Front cover Transfer charger
2 5
Side cover Charger cleaner
Fusing unit release lever
AR-208S/208D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 1
3. Operation panel
1 2 3 4 5
AR-208D
Display
READY TO COPY. 100% 8.5x11 0
18
19
20
21
6 7
1
8 9 10 11
12 13 14
15
2
16
17
[MODE SELECT] key / Mode indicators Press this key to select the mode. The indicator of the selected mode lights (copy, printer, scanner, fax mode indicators). Numeric keys Use these to enter the number of copies and other numerical settings. The keys can also be used to select items in function setting menus. Power save indicator This lights up when the power save function is activated. Error indicator This lights steadily or blinks when a paper misfeed or other error occurs. Tray location indicator Indicates the selected paper tray. The indicator blinks when the tray is out of paper during operation or is not closed properly. [2-SIDED COPY] key (AR-208D) [2-SIDED SCAN] key (AR-208S) Press in copy mode to select one-sided or two-sided settings for the original and for the output. [ ] key ( ), [ ] key ( ), [ENTER] key Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to select an item in a function setting menu. Press the [ENTER] key to enter a selection. [COPY RATIO] key Press to select an enlargement or reduction ratio. To select a preset ratio setting, press the [COPY RATIO] key and select the desired preset ratio. To select a ratio that is not preset, press the [COPY RATIO] key, select the preset ratio that is closest to the desired ratio, and then press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to increase or decrease the ratio in increments of 1%. [START] key ( ) / Ready indicator The ready indicator lights up when copying or scanning is possible. To begin copying, press the [START] key ( ). The [START] key ( ) is also pressed to return to normal operation from auto power shut-off mode. Shows the selected paper size. A checkmark " " appears when the exposure has been changed, or when two-sided copying, sort, 2 IN 1, or margin shift is selected.
Display This shows messages indicating the machine status and any problems that occur, as well as user programs and function setting menus. [CLEAR] key ( ) Use this to clear the set number of copies, as well as cancel a job that is in progress. When a setting menu appears, use this key to move back to the previous menu level. RSPF indicator This lights up when an original is placed in the RSPF. [TRAY SELECT] key ( ) Use to select the paper tray that has the desired paper for copying. [MENU] key Press this key to select the paper size for copying, to configure a user program or to display the total count. [E-SORT/SP.FUN] key Press to select the sort function, 2 IN 1 copy function, or margin shift function. [EXPOSURE] key Use to switch from auto exposure adjustment to text mode or photo mode. [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) This returns all functions to the default settings. When pressed in a setting menu, this returns the settings and display to the initial state.
5 7
6 8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Shows the current copy ratio.
19 21
20
Shows the number of copies that has been entered with the numeric keys.
4. Motors, solenoids and clutch

11
12 8
10 3 9
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Part name Main motor Scanner motor Toner motor Cooling fan motor Resist roller solenoid Paper feed solenoid Multi paper feed solenoid Drive motor Duplex motor Shifter motor Reverse clutch Paper feed solenoid (RSPF) Control signal MM MRMT TM VFM RRS CPFS1 MPFS SPMT DMT SFTM SRVC SPUS
Function / Operation Drives the copier. Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit). Supplies toner. Ventilate the fuser section. Resist roller rotation control solenoid Cassette Paper feed solenoid 1 Multi manual pages feed solenoid Drives the RSPF. Devices the duplex paper transport section (Duplex model only) Drives the shifter. Reverses the rotating direction of the roller. Feeds paper.
5. Sensors and switches

7 2 1 8
10
11
5 6
No. Name 1 Scanner unit home position sensor 2 POD sensor 3 PPD2 sensor 4 Cassette detection switch 5 PPD1 sensor 6 Door switch 7 8 9 Paper empty sensor Paper exit sensor PD1 sensor Signal MHPS POD PPD2 CED1 PPD1 DSW SPID SRJD PD1 SCOD SPPD Type Transmission sensor Transmission sensor Transmission sensor Micro-switch Transmission sensor Micro-switch Transmission sensor Transmission sensor Micro-switch Transmission sensor Transmission sensor Function Scanner unit home position detection Paper exit detection Paper transport detection 2 Cassette installation detection Paper transport detection 1 Door open/close detection (safety switch for 24V) Paper entry detection Paper exit detection Paper width detect Cover open/close detection Paper transport detection Output "H" at home position "H" at paper pass "L" at paper pass "H" at cassette insertion "L" at paper pass 1 or 0V of 24V at door open "H" paper empty "H" paper empty "H" at A4 size or less "L" at A4 size or more "L" open "H" paper empty
10 Upper door open/close sensor 11 Paper sensor
6. PWB unit
5 1
2 11
9 6
10 4 3 7
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Name Exposure lamp invertor PWB Main PWB (MCU) Operation PWB High voltage PWB CCD sensor PWB LSU motor PWB TCS PWB LSU PWB FAX-operation PWB Power PWB Modem PWB Function Exposure lamp (CCFL) control Copier control Operation input/display High voltage control For image scanning For polygon motor drive For toner sensor control For laser control FAX operation input (AR-FX13 option) AC power input, DC voltage control FAX control (AR-FX13 option)
7. Cross sectional view

3 18 5 15 16 17
4 19 20
6 7 8 9 10
14
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Part name Scanner unit Exposure lamp LSU (Laser unit) Paper exit roller Main charger Heat roller Pressure roller Drum Transfer unit Pickup roller Manual paper feed tray Manual paper feed roller PS roller unit Paper feed roller Pickup roller Separation roller Upper transport roller Paper exit roller Lower transport roller PS roller
13
12
11
Function and operation Illuminates the original with the copy lamp and passes the reflected light to the lens unit (CCD). Exposure lamp (CCFL) Illuminates original Converts the original image signal into laser beams and writes onto the drum. Roller for paper exit Provides negative charges evenly to the drum surface. Fuses toner on the paper. (Teflon roller) Fuses toner on the paper. (Silicon rubber roller) Forms images. Transfers images onto the drum. Picks up the manual feed paper. (In multi feed only) Tray for manual feed paper Transport the paper from the manual paper feed port. Takes synchronization between the lead edge and the rear edge of the paper. Picks up a sheet of paper from the cassette. Picks up documents. Separates documents to feed properly. Transports of a document. Discharges documents. Transports of a document. Feeds documents to the scanning section.
[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

1. Copier installation
Improper installation may damage the copier. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the copier is moved. Caution: If the copier is moved from a cool place to a warm place, condensation may form inside the copier. Operation in this condition will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions. Leave the copier at room temperature for at least 2 hours before use. Do not install your copier in areas that are: damp, humid, or very dusty
2. Cautions on handling
Be careful in handling the copier as follows to maintain the performance of this copier. Do not drop the copier, subject it to shock or strike it against any object.
Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight. Doing so will damage the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge, causing poor print quality.
exposed to direct sunlight
poorly ventilated
Store spare supplies such as drum cartridges and toner cartridges in a dark place without removing from the package before use. If they are exposed to direct sunlight, poor print quality may result. Do not touch the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge. Doing so will damage the surface of the cartridge, causing poor print quality.
3. Checking packed components and accessories

subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater. Open the carton and check if the following components and accessories are included.
Operation manual
The copier should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easy connection. Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets the specified voltage and current requirements. Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded. Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing and proper ventilation.
Software CD-ROM
Drum cartridge (installed in unit)
8" (20cm)
8"(20cm)
4" (10cm)
4" (10cm)
AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 1
4. Unpacking
Be sure to hold the handles on both sides of the machine to unpack the machine and carry it to the installation location.
6. Developer unit installation

1) 2) 3) Open the side and front cabinets of the copier. 4) Remove the locking tape of the developer unit. 5) Remove the screw which is fixing the copier and Developer unit. 6) Remove Developer unit slowly from the copier.
1 3
5. Removing protective packing materials

1) Remove all pieces of tape shown in the illustration below and then open the RSPF and remove the protective materials. Take out the bag containing the toner cartridge.
4
7) Remove the screw (1 pc). 8) Remove Upper developer unit.
2) Release the scan head locking switch.

Grasp here and turn in the direction of the arrow.
(A)
Lock
Unlock
3) Open the bypass tray, and then open the side cover while pressing the side cover open button.
9) Shake the aluminum bag to stir developer 10) Supply developer from the aluminum bag to the top of the MX roller evenly.
4) Remove the CAUTION tape from the front cover and remove the two protective pins from the fusing machine by pulling the strings upward one at a time.
Protective pins CAUTION tape

Note: Be careful not to splash developer outside Developer unit. AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 2
11) Attach Upper developer unit and fix it with a screw. 12) Rotate the MG roller gear to distribute developer evenly.
2) Hold the section of Toner unit shown in the figure below, remove the packing tape, and remove the cushion. 3) Pull out the cushion in the arrow direction.
4) Insert Toner unit carefully into the copier. Note: Never rotate the gear in the reverse direction. Note: When carrying Developer unit, do not tilt it extremely as shown with the arrow in the figure below. (Prevention of splash of developer) 5) Insert until the hook is engaged with the copier as shown in the figure below.
6) Pull out the shutter in the arrow direction. 13) Insert Developer unit carefully into the copier. Note: Quick insertion may result in splash of developer. Be sure to insert carefully. 14) Confirm that Developer unit is completely inserted to the bottom of the machine, fix Developer unit and the machine with a screw. 15) Completion of Developer unit installation
7. Toner cartridge installation

1) To prevent against uneven distribution of toner, hold Toner unit with both hands and shake it several times horizontally.
Note: Do not hold and carry the shutter. Otherwise the shutter may drop and Toner unit may drop. 7) Completion of Toner unit installation Close the front and side cabinets.
8. Loading the paper tray

Note: Make sure that the paper is not torn, is free of dust, and has no wrinkles or curled edges. 1) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until it stops.
5) Fan the paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure that the edges go under the corner hooks. Note: Do not load paper above the maximum height line ( Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed. ).
If the paper is not fanned, double-feeds or misfeeds may occur. Make sure the stack of paper is straight before loading it. When adding paper, take the remaining paper out and combine it into a single stack with the new paper. Make sure that all the paper in the stack is the same size and type.
2) Remove the pressure plate lock. Rotate the pressure plate lock in the direction of the arrow to remove it while pressing down on the pressure plate of the paper tray.
When loading paper, ensure that there is no space between the paper and the guide, and make sure that the guide is not set too narrow and causes the paper to bend. Incorrect loading will cause the paper to skew or misfeed.
3) Store the pressure plate lock which has been removed in step 2. To store the pressure plate lock, rotate the lock to secure it as shown below.
6) Gently push the paper tray back into the machine. Note: If you loaded a different size of paper than was loaded previously in the tray. When not using the machine for an extended period, remove all paper from the paper tray and store it in a dry place. If paper is left in the machine for an extended period, the paper will absorb moisture from the air, resulting in paper jams.
Pressure plate lock
4) Squeeze the lock lever of the front guide and slide the paper guide (A) to match the width of the paper, and move the paper guide (B) to the appropriate slot as marked on the tray.
9. Power to copier
1) Ensure that the power switch of the copier is in the OFF position. Insert the attached power cord into the power cord socket at the rear of the copier.
Paper guide (B) Paper guide (A)

The front guide is a slide-type guide. Grasp the locking knob on the guide and slide the guide to the indicator line of the paper to be loaded. The left guide is an insert-type guide. Remove it and then insert it at the indicator line of the paper to be loaded.
2) Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet. 3) The document stopper may fall down by vibrations during transit of the product. If documents are set under such a state, the JAM display may be indicated. If the JAM display is indicated, remove the documents, turn OFF/ON the power SW, complete initializing of the RSPF, then set the documents again.
10. Software
The CD-ROM that accompanies the machine contains the following software:
B. Installing the software

Note: The screen images in this manual are mainly for Windows XP. With other versions of Windows, some screen images may be different from those in this manual. In the following explanations it is assumed that the mouse is configured for right hand operation. If an error message appears, follow the instructions on the screen to solve the problem. After the problem is solved, the installation procedure will continue. Depending on the problem, you may have to click the "Cancel" button to exit the installer. In this case, reinstall the software from the beginning after solving the problem. 1) The USB cable must not be connected to the machine. Make sure that the cable is not connected before proceeding. If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If this happens, click the "Cancel" button to close the window and disconnect the cable. Note: The cable will be connected in step 13). 2) Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive. 3) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then doubleclick the CD-ROM icon. In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, click "Computer", and then double-click the CD-ROM icon. In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click "My Computer", and then double-click the CD-ROM icon. 4) Double-click the "setup" icon. In Windows Vista, if a message screen appears asking you for confirmation, click "Allow". 5) The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will appear. Make sure that you understand the contents of the software license, and then click the "Yes" button. Note: You can show the "SOFTWARE LICENSE" in a different language by selecting the desired language from the language menu. To install the software in the selected language, continue the installation with that language selected. 6) Read the "Readme First" in the "Welcome" window and then click the "Next" button. 7) To install all of the software, click the "Standard" button and go to step 12). To install particular packages, click the "Custom" button and go to next step.
MFP driver
Printer driver The printer driver enables you to use the printer function of the machine. The printer driver includes the Print Status Window. This is a utility that monitors the machine and informs you of the printing status, the name of the document currently being printed, and error messages. Please note that the Print Status Window does not operate when the machine is used as a network printer. Scanner driver* The scanner driver allows you to use the scanning function of the machine with TWAIN-compliant and WIA-compliant applications.
Sharpdesk*
Sharpdesk is an integrated software environment that makes it easy to manage documents and image files, and launch applications.
Button Manager*
Button Manager allows you to use the scanner menus on the machine to scan a document. *: The scanning feature can only be used with computers that are connected to the machine by a USB cable.
A. Before installation
Hardware and software requirements
Check the following hardware and software requirements in order to install the software. Computer type Operating system*2 *3 Display Hard disk free space Other hardware requirements IBM PC/AT or compatible computer equipped with a USB 2.0/1.1*1 Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional*4, Windows XP Professional*4, Windows XP Home Edition*4, Windows Vista*4 1024 x 768 dots (XGA) display with 16bit 150 MB or more An environment on which any of the operating systems listed above can fully operate
*1: Compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Home Edition or Windows Vista preinstalled model standardly equipped with a USB port. *2: Printing is not available in MS-DOS mode. *3: The machine does not support printing from a Macintosh environment. *4: Administrator's rights are required to install the software using the installer.
Installation environment and usable software

The following table shows the drivers and software that can be installed for each version of Windows and interface connection method. Cable USB Operating Printer Scanner Button Sharpdesk system driver driver Manager 1 Windows 98/ Available* Available Me/2000/XP/ Vista
*1: The printer driver that is installed will vary depending on the type of connection between the machine and your computer. Install the software according to the Operation Manual.
8) Click the "MFP Driver" button. Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected.
Installing the Utility Software 11) Click the "Button Manager" or the "Sharpdesk" button. Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected. Follow the on-screen instructions.
9) Select "Connected to this computer" and click the "Next" button. Follow the on-screen instructions. Caution: In Windows 98/Me/2000, if the following screen appears, click the "Skip" button or the "Continue" button as appropriate to continue the Sharpdesk installation. If "Skip" is selected, the Sharpdesk installation will continue without installing Sharpdesk Imaging. If "Continue" is selected, Sharpdesk Imaging will be installed. If Imaging for Windows is installed on your computer, Sharpdesk Imaging will overwrite Imaging for Windows.
Caution: If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway". If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". 10) You will return to the window of step 8). If you wish to install Button Manager or Sharpdesk, click the "Utility Software" button. If you do not wish to install the Utility Software, click the "Close" button and go to step 12). Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer. 12) When installing is finished, click the "Close" button. Caution: If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway". If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". A message will appear instructing you to connect the machine to your computer. Click the "OK" button. Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer. 13) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and then connect the USB cable. Windows will detect the machine and a Plug and Play screen will appear.
14) Follow the instructions in the plug and play window to install the driver. Follow the on-screen instructions. Caution: If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway". If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". This completes the installation of the software. If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as explained in "C. Setting up Button Manager". If you installed Sharpdesk, the Sharpdesk setup screen will appear. Follow the instructions in the screen to set up Sharpdesk.
(2) Using the machine as a shared printer

If the machine will be used as a shared printer on a network, follow these steps to install the printer driver in the client computer. Note: To configure the appropriate settings in the print server, see the operation manual or help file of your operating system. 1) Perform steps 2) through 6) in "Installing the software". 2) Click the "Custom" button.
(1) Connecting a USB cable

Follow the procedure below to connect the machine to your computer. A USB cable for connecting the machine to your computer is not included with the machine. Please purchase the appropriate cable for your computer. Caution: USB is available with a PC/AT compatible computer that was originally equipped with USB and had Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP or Windows Vista preinstalled. Do not connect the USB cable before installing the printer driver. The USB cable should be connected during installation of the printer driver. Note If the machine will be connected using a USB 2.0 port of your computer, please purchase a USB cable that supports USB 2.0. To obtain the fastest USB 2.0 data transfer speed, "USB2.0 MODE SWITCH" in the machine's user programs must be set to "HI-SPEED". For more information, see "[12] USER PROGRAM". Use the machine's "HI-SPEED" mode only when using a computer that is running Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Even when the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is used, it may not be possible to obtain full USB 2.0 speed if a PC card supporting USB 2.0 is used. To obtain the latest driver (which may enable a higher speed), contact the manufacturer of your PC card. Connection is also possible using a USB 1.1 port on your computer. However, the specifications will be USB 1.1 specifications (FullSpeed). 1) Insert the cable into the USB connector on the machine. 4) Select "Connected via the network" and click the "Next" button.
3) Click the "MFP Driver" button. Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected.
2) Insert the other end of the cable into your computer's USB port.
5) Click the "Add Network Port" button. In Windows Vista, the "Add Network Port" button does not appear.
2) Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" icon and select "Properties" from the "File" menu. In Windows Vista, select "Properties" from the "Organize" menu. 3) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab. 4) Select "SC1:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu.
6) Select the network printer that is shared and click the "OK" button. Ask your network administrator for the server name and printer name of the machine on the network.
5) Select "Start this program" and then select "Sharp Button Manager T" from the pull-down menu.
7) In the printer port selection window, verify the network printer that is shared and whether the machine is to be used as the default printer, make the selections and click the "Next" button. Follow the on-screen instructions. Caution: If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway". If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". 8) You will return to the window of step 3). Click the "Close" button. Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer. This completes the installation of the software. 6) Click the "Apply" button. 7) Repeat Steps 4) through 6) to link Button Manager to "SC2:" through "SC6:". Select "SC2:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu. Select "Start this program", select "Sharp Button Manager T" from the pull-down menu, and then click the "Apply" button. Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:". When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button to close the screen. Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6). The scan settings for each of scan menu 1 through 6 can be changed with the setting window of Button Manager. For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Settings" in the Online Manual.
C. Setting up Button Manager

Button Manager is a software program that works with the scanner driver to enable scanning from the machine. To scan using the machine, Button Manager must be linked with the scan menu on the machine. Follow the steps below to link Button Manager to scanner events.
(1) Windows XP/Vista

1) Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", click "Printers and Other Hardware", and then click "Scanners and Cameras". In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, select "Control Panel" and click "Hardware and Sound", and then click "Scanners and Cameras".
(2) Windows 98/Me/2000

1) Click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and then click "Control Panel". 2) Double-click the "Scanners and Cameras" icon. Note: If the "Scanners and Cameras" icon does not appear in Windows Me, click "view all Control Panel options". 3) Select "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click the "Properties" button. In Windows Me, right click "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click "Properties" in the pop-up menu. AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 8
4) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab. 5) Select "SC1:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu.
11. Interface
A. USB
Connector
4-pin ACON UBR23-4K2200 Type-B connector
Cable
Shielded twisted pair cable (2 m (6 feet) Max.: high-speed transmission equivalent)
Pin configuration
The pin numbers and signal names are listed in the following table. Pin No. 1 2 3 4 6) Select "Sharp Button Manager T" in "Send to this application". Signal name +5V -DATA +DATA GND
12. Moving
Moving instructions
When moving the unit, follow the procedure below. Note: If other applications are shown, deselect the checkboxes for the other applications and leave only the Button Manager checkbox selected. 7) Click the "Apply" button. 8) Repeat Steps 5) through 7) to link Button Manager to "SC2:" through "SC6:". Select "SC2:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu. Select "Sharp Button Manager T" in "Send to this application" and click the "Apply" button. Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:". When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button to close the screen. Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6). The scan settings for each of scan menus 1 through 6 can be changed with the setting window of Button Manager. For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Settings" in the Online Manual. Note: When moving this unit, be sure to remove the toner cartridge in advance. 1) Turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the outlet. 2) Open the side cover and front cover, in that order. Remove the toner cartridge and close the front cover and side cover, in that order. To open and close the side cover and front cover, and to remove the toner cartridge. 3) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until it stops. 4) Push the center of the pressure plate down until it locks in place and lock the plate using the pressure plate lock which has been stored in the front of the paper tray. 5) Push the paper tray back into the unit. 6) Lock the scan head locking switch. Note: When shipping the unit, the scan head locking switch must be locked to prevent shipping damage. 7) Close the multi-bypass tray and the paper output tray extension, and attach the packing materials and tape which were removed during installation of the unit. 8) Pack the unit into the carton.
13. Scanner moisture-proof kit

If the machine is installed in a highly humid environment, you can alleviate dew condensation inside the scanner by installing the scanner moisture-proof kit described below.
3) Remove the rear cover for the document glass. <1> Remove the two screws and then remove the right glass holder. <2> Slide the rear cover for the document glass to remove it. <3> Remove the table glass.
A. Components
Scanner moisture-proof kit (DKIT-0016QSZZ) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name Scanner condensation prevention mylar Optical right hole mylar B Scanner motor metal plate cushion Scanner upper surface cushion Scanner motor lower mylar Scanner UPG mylar J3 Fan housing cushion Part code PSHEZ0493QSZZ PSHEZ0469QSZZ PMLT-0106QSZZ PMLT-0105QSZZ PSHEP0600QSZZ PSHEP0599QSZZ PMLT-0108QSZ1 Qty 3 2 2
3 2
1 1 1 1
B. Precautions at installation
Clean the position where each cushion/mylar is attached with industrial alcohol before the work. 4) Attach the Scanner condensation prevention mylar at the 3 positions on the rear side of the main unit as described below. Note: The hole should be covered with the mylar. Align the edge of the mylar to the R part (the yellow line in the diagram below) so that the hole of the metal plate is covered as much as possible.
C. Attachment method
Turn the main switch to the "OFF" position and remove the power plug from the outlet. 1) Detach the RSPF. Detach the RSPF from the copier and softly place it on top of the original table as shown below.
2) Remove the rear cabinet. <1> Unscrew the screw and remove the rear cabinet shielding plate. (Save the screw.) <2> Unscrew three screws and remove the rear cabinet. (Save the screws.) <3> Disconnect the connector of the RSPF, and remove the RSPF from the machine.
Align the edge of the mylar to the R part (the yellow line in the diagram below) so that the hole of the metal plate is covered as much as possible.
1 2
Attach along the edge of the projection (the yellow line in the diagram below).
6) Attach the Scanner motor metal plate cushion at 1 position on the attachment plate of the motor on the rear side of the main unit. Note: The hole on the top of the motor unit should be covered with the mylar. Align the edge of the metal plate and the edge of the cushion (the yellow line in the diagram below).
5) Attach the Optical right hole mylar B at the 2 positions shown in the diagrams below which are at the top of the rear side of the main unit. Note: The holes should be covered with the mylar. Attach along the edge of the cushion (the yellow line in the diagram below). Align with the inside line of the bent part (the yellow line in the diagram below).
20mm - 25mm
Press and attach the cushion aligning it to the metal plate so that there will be no gap between them.
Stick the excessive part on the side.
Align with the raised part (the yellow line in the diagram below). Match the center of the mylar (in the horizontal direction) to the center of the raised part.
Stick the excessive part on the side.
7) Attach the Scanner upper surface cushion on the top and the rear side at the rear side of the main unit. Align the cushion with the side of the raised part (the yellow line in the diagram below).
9) Attach the Scanner motor lower mylar at 1 position under the motor attachment plate on the rear side of the main unit. Note: The mylar should cover the hole under the motor unit. Attach matching the hole (the yellow mark in the diagram) and along with the side edge (the yellow arrow in the diagram). Disconnect the motor harness from the connector and take off the snap band from the hole.
Do not cover this hole.
Align the edge of the cushion with the edge of the metal plate.
Bend the part which is sticking out to the rear side of the scanner and attach to the surface. Press the mylar with a sharp-pointed stick or something so that it is stuck correctly. 10) Attach the Scanner motor metal plate cushion covering the bottom part of the Scanner motor lower mylar. Note: The hole under the motor unit should be covered. Attach the cushion to cover the gap between the mylar and the metal plate (the yellow mark). Press the cushion at the steps shown in the diagram so that there will be no gap. Press the cushion to make sure all the holes are covered. 8) Bend the edge of the Scanner motor lower mylar and stick together.
Stick the lower part of the cushion to the mylar, too.
Stick together.
Stick together.
Press the cushion with a sharp-pointed stick or something to fill the gap between the mylar and the metal plate.
13) Attach the Fan housing cushion to the cooling fan at the position shown in the diagram below. Cover the top and the right side of the fan housing when you see the fan housing from the backside of the machine. Note: Please make sure the double-sided tape is not exposed where the cushion is sticking out from the edge of the fan housing.
11) Attach the motor connector and the snap band to the original position.
View from the arrow A
Back side
12) Attach the Scanner UPG mylar J3 to cover the hole on the right side of inside of the scanner. Note: The mylar should cover the hole shown by the arrow in the diagram. Attach along with the bent part of the metal plate and align the edge of the mylar with the line shown in the diagram (the yellow line in the diagram).
Reference position Attach the cushion leaving 3 - 7mm from the edge.
3 - 7mm
Attach the cushion leaving 3 - 7mm from the edge so that the gap between the Fan housing cushion and the filter of the rear cabinet is filled for sure. 14) Attach the parts removed in the items 1), 2), and 3).
[6] COPY PROCESS

An OPC drum is used for the photoconductor. (Structure of the OPC drum layers) OPC layer (20 microns thick) Pigment layer (0.2 to 0.3 microns thick) Aluminum drum
1. Functional diagram
Main charger Laser beam Cleaning blade
MG roller
Drum
Transfer unit Resist roller

(Basic operation cycle)
Semiconductor laser
Focus correction lens
Main high voltage unit
Exposure Charge
Saw tooth
Toner
Drum Developing
Cleaning
Cleaning blade
Developer
Waste toner box
PS roller
To face down tray
Paper release
Fusing
Separation
Transfer
Synchronization with drum
Manual feed
Heat roller Heater lamp
Electrode
Transfer charger Transfer high voltage unit
Cassette paper feed
Print process
Paper transport route
AR-208S/208D
COPY PROCESS 6 - 1
2. Outline of print process

This printer is a non-impact printer that uses a semiconductor laser and electrostatic print process. This printer uses an OPC (Organic Photo Conductor) for its photoconductive material. First, voltage from the main corona unit charges the drum surface and a latent image is formed on the drum surface using a laser beam. This latent image forms a visible image on the drum surface when toner is applied. The toner image is then transferred onto the print paper by the transfer corona and fused on the print paper in the fusing section with a combination of heat and pressure. Step-1: Charge Step-2: Exposure * Latent image is formed on the drum. Step-3: Developing Latent image formed on the drum is then changed into visible image with toner. Step-4: Transfer The visible image (toner image) on the drum is transferred onto the print paper. Step-5: Cleaning Residual toner on the drum surface is removed and collected by the cleaning blade. Step-6: Optical discharge Residual charge on the drum surface is removed, by semiconductor laser beam.
Step-2: Exposure (laser beam, lens) A Laser beam is generated from the semiconductor laser and controlled by the print pattern signal. The laser writes onto the OPC drum surface through the polygon mirrors and lens. The resistance of the OPC layer decreases for an area exposed by the laser beam (corresponding to the print pattern signal). The beam neutralizes the negative charge. An electrostatic latent image is formed on the drum surface.
Semiconductor laser
Exposure (semiconductor laser) OPC layer Pigment layer Aluminum drum
Drum surface charge after the exposure OPC layer Pigment layer Aluminum layer
3. Actual print process

Step-1: DC charge A uniform negative charge is applied over the OPC drum surface by the main charging unit. Stable potential is maintained by means of the Scorotron charger. Positive charges are generated in the aluminum layer.
Non-image area
Image area
About DC5.5KV ( 580V/ 400V)
AR-208S/208D
COPY PROCESS 6 - 2
Step-3: Developing (DC bias) A bias potential is applied to the MG roller in the two component magnetic brush developing method, and the toner is charged negative through friction with the carrier. Non-image area of the drum surface charged with negative potential repel the toner, whereas the laser exposed portions where no negative charges exist, attract the toner. As a result, a visible image appears on the drum surface.
Step-4: Transfer The visible image on the drum surface is transferred onto the print paper by applying a positive charge from the transfer corona to the backside of the print paper.
:Carrier (Magnetized particle) :Toner (Charge negative by friction) (N) (S) Permanent magnet (provided in three locations)
N S N
About DC 5.2kV
DC 400V 8V
MG roller
Step-5: Separation Since the print paper is charged positively by the transfer corona, it is discharged by the separation corona. The separation corona is connected to ground. Step-6: Cleaning Toner remaining on the drum is removed and collected by the cleaning blade. It is transported to the waste toner collecting section in the cleaning unit by the waste toner transport roller.
Toner is attracted over the shadowed area because of the developing bias.
AR-208S/208D
COPY PROCESS 6 - 3
Step-7: Optical discharge (Semiconductor laser) Before the drum rotation is stopped, the semiconductor laser is radiated onto the drum to reduce the electrical resistance in the OPC layer and eliminate residual charge, providing a uniform state to the drum surface for the next page to be printed. When the electrical resistance is reduced, positive charges on the aluminum layer are moved and neutralized with negative charges on the OPC layer.
Start
1) Because the grid potential is at a low level, the drum potential is at about -400V. (Carrier may not be attracted though the carrier is pulled towards the drum by the electrostatic force of -400V. 2) Developing bias (-400V) is applied when the photoconductor potential is switched from LOW to HIGH. 3) Once developing bias (-400V) is applied and the photoconductor potential rises to HIGH, toner will not be attracted to the drum.
Semiconductor laser
Stop
The reverse sequence takes place. Retaining developing bias at an abnormal occurrence Function The developing bias will be lost if the power supply was removed during print process. In this event, the drum potential slightly abates and the carrier makes deposits on the drum because of strong static power. To prevent this, the machine incorporates a function to retain the developing bias for a certain period and decrease the voltage gradually against possible power loss. Basic function Normally, the developing bias voltage is retained for a certain time before the drum comes to a complete stop if the machine should stop before completing the normal print cycle. The developing bias can be added before resuming the operation after an abnormal interruption. Therefore, carrier will not make a deposit on the drum surface.
Charge by the Scorotron charger

Function The Scorotron charger functions to maintain uniform surface potential on the drum at all times, It control the surface potential regardless of the charge characteristics of the photoconductor. Basic function A screen grid is placed between the saw tooth and the photoconductor. A stable voltage is added to the screen grid to maintain the corona current on the photoconductor. As the photoconductor is charged by the saw tooth from the main corona unit, the surface potential increases. This increases the current flowing through the screen grid. When the photoconductor potential nears the grid potential, the current turns to flow to the grid so that the photoconductor potential can be maintained at a stable level.
Process controlling
Function The print pattern signal is converted into an invisible image by the semiconductor laser using negative to positive (reversible) developing method. Therefore, if the developing bias is added before the drum is charged, toner is attracted onto the drum. If the developing bias is not added when the drum is charged, the carrier is attracted to the drum because of the strong electrostatic force of the drum. To avoid this, the process is controlled by adjusting the drum potential and the grid potential of the Scorotron charger. Basic function Voltage added to the screen grid can be selected, high and low. To make it easily understood, the figure below shows voltage transition at the developer unit.
0 START STOP
Print potential
Toner attract potential 2)
Developing bias
3)
1) Low
4)
High
Time
Drum potential
AR-208S/208D
COPY PROCESS 6 - 4
[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS

1. Outline of operation
The outline of operation is described referring to the basic configuration.
(Basic configuration)
(Option) Scanner section FAX modem FAX
Operation section
CCD
(Option) USB FAX I/F

USB
Network Box
Network
MCU (Main control/image process section)
Printer/ Scanner I/F
PC USB
LSU (Laser unit) Laser diode, Polygon mirror lens Laser beam
Paper exit Fusing section
Process section Printer section
Paper transport section
Cassette paper feed section
Manual paper feed section
(Outline of copy operation)

Setting conditions 1) Set copy conditions such as the copy quantity and the copy density with the operation section, and press the COPY button. The information on copy conditions is sent to the MCU. Image scanning 2) When the COPY button is pressed, the scanner section starts scanning of images. The light from the copy lamp is reflected by the document and passed through the lens to the CCD. Photo signal/Electric signal conversion 3) The image is converted into electrical signals by the CCD circuit and passed to the MCU. Image process 4) The document image signal sent from the CCD circuit is processed under the revised conditions and sent to the LSU (laser unit) as print data. Electric signal/Photo signal (laser beam) conversion 5) The LSU emits laser beams according to the print data. (Electrical signals are converted into photo signals.) 6) The laser beams are radiated through the polygon mirror and various lenses to the OPC drum.
Printing 7) Electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum according to the laser beams, and the latent images are developed to be visible images(toner images). 8) Meanwhile the paper is fed to the image transfer section in synchronization with the image lead edge. 9) After the transfer of toner images onto the paper, the toner images are fused to the paper by the fusing section. The copied paper is discharged onto the exit tray.
(Outline of printer operation)

The print data sent from the PC are passed through the I/F and the MCU to the LSU. The procedures after that are the same as above 5) and later.
(Outline of scanner operation)

The scan data are passed through the MCU and the I/F to the PC according to the conditions requested by the PC or set by the operations with the operation panel.
AR-208S/208D
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 1
2. Scanner section
A. Scanner unit
The scanner unit in the digital copier scans images. It is composed of the optical unit and the drive unit. The optical unit performs scanning in the main scan direction with the light receiving elements (color CCD). The drive unit performs scanning in the sub scanning direction by moving the optical unit.
Spectral sensitivity characteristics (Standard characteristics)
B. Optical system
Two white lamps are used as the light source. Light radiated from the light source is applied to the document on the document table. The reflected light from the document is reflected 4 times by No. 1 - No. 3 mirrors and passed through the reduction lens to form images on the light-receiving surface of 3-line CCD. The light-receiving surface of the color CCD is provided with 3 line scanning sections for RGB. Separate images scanned in each color section are overlapped to complete color scanning. (When PC scanning) The resolution is 600dpi. When copying, only the green component is used to print with the printer. The color component for printing can be switched to red or blue by the service simulation.
100
100.0
Relative sensitivity
Wavelength [nm]
(Spectrum characteristics of the color CCD)
10
Sensitivity
75 50
50.2 45.4
25
380
480
580
680
780
7 3 5 4
(Optical unit) 1 4 7 10 Table glass Mirror 1 CCD PWB Original 2 5 8 Optical unit Mirror 2 Lamp 3 6 9 Lens Mirror 3 Reflector
Wavelength [nm]
(Spectrum characteristics of the lamp)
C. Drive system
The drive system is composed of the scanner motor, the pulley gear, the idle pulley, the idle gear, the belt 473, the belt 190, and the shaft. The motor rotation is converted into reciprocated movements of the belt 473 through the idle gear, the pulley gear, the belt 190, and the idle pulley to drive the optical unit.
3
1 4 7
4
Scanner motor Belt 473 Shaft
6
2 5 8 Pulley gear Belt 190 Idle gear
8
3 6 9
5
Idle pulley Optical unit Table glass
AR-208S/208D
3. Laser unit
The image data sent from the MCU (image process circuit) is sent to the LSU (laser unit), where it is converted into laser beams.
B. Laser beam path
A. Basic structure
The LSU unit is the writing section of the digital optical system. The semiconductor laser is used as the light source, and images are formed on the OPC drum by the polygon mirror and f lens, etc. The laser beams are passed through the collimator lens, the cylindrical lens, the polygon mirror, the f lens, and the mirror to form images on the OPC drum in the main scanning direction. The laser emitting PWB is provided with the APC (auto power control) in order to eliminate fluctuations in the laser power. The BD PWB works for measurement of the laser writing start point.
C. Composition
Effective scanning width: 216mm (max.) Resolution: 600dpi Beam diameter: 75um in the main scanning direction, 80um in the sub scanning direction
6
No 1 2 3 4 Component Semiconductor laser Collimator lens Cylinder lens Polygon mirror, polygon motor 5 BD (Lens, PWB) 6 f lens
Image surface power: 0.18 0.01mW (Laser wavelength 770 795nm) Polygon motor section: Brushless motor 20.787rpm No. of mirror surfaces: 5 surfaces
Function Generates laser beams. Converges laser beams in parallel. Takes the focus. Reflects laser beams at a constant rpm. Detects start timing of laser scanning. Converges laser beams at a spot on the drum. Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as each other. (Refer to the figure below.)
4. Fuser section
Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as each other.
abc
a b c
d=e=f
d e f
f LENS
AR-208S/208D
A. General description
General block diagram (cross section)
2) The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is set to 160 200C. The surface temperature during the power save mode is set to 100C. 3) The self-check function comes active when one of the following malfunctions occurs, and an "H" is displayed on the multicopy window. a. When the heat roller surface temperature rises above 240C. b. When the heat roller surface temperature drops below 100C during the copy cycle.
Thermal fuse
Separator pawl PPD2
Separator pawl
c. Open thermistor d. Open thermal fuse e. When the heat roller temperature does not reach 190C within 27 second after supplying the power.
Thermistor Heat roller Paper guide

Top view
Pressure roller
(4) Fusing resistor

Fusing resistor This model is provided with a fusing resistor in the fusing section to improve transfer efficiency. Since the upper heat roller is conductive, when using copy paper that contains moisture and the distance between the transfer unit and the fusing unit is short, the transfer current may find a path to ground via the copy paper, the upper heat roller and the discharging brush.
Heat roller
Thermistor
Thermal fuse Heater lamp
5. Paper feed section and paper transport section

A. Paper transport path and general operations
4 Separator pawl 3 5 2
(1)
Heat roller
1 6 7 8 9 10
A Teflon roller is used for the heat roller and a silicone rubber roller is used for the lower heat roller for better toner fusing performance and paper separation.
(2)
Separator pawl
Three separator pawls are used on the upper heat roller. The separator pawls are Teflon coated to reduce friction with the roller and prevent a smear on the paper caused by the separator pawl.
(3)
Thermal control
14 13 12 11
1) The heater lamp, thermistor, main PWB, DC power supply PWB, and triac within the power supply unit are used to control the temperature in the fuser unit. To prevent against abnormally high temperature in the fuser unit, a thermal breaker and thermal fuse are used for safety purposes.
Heated by the heater lamp. (800W)
Safety device (thermal breaker, thermal fuse)
1 Scanner unit 8 Drum 2 Copy lamp 9 Transfer unit 3 LSU (Laser unit) 10 Pickup roller 4 Paper exit roller 11 Manual paper feed tray 5 Main charger 12 Manual paper feed roller 6 Heat roller 13 PS roller unit 7 Pressure roller 14 Paper feed roller Paper feed is made in two ways; the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed. The tray is of universal-type, and has the capacity of 250 sheets. The front loading system allows you to install or remove the tray from the front cabinet. The general descriptions on the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed operation are given below.
The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is sensed by the thermistor.
Triac (in the power supply unit)
Level of the thermistor is controlled by the main PWB.
With the signal from the main PWB, the triac is controlled on and off. (power supply PWB)
AR-208S/208D
(1)
Cassette paper feed operation
1) The figure below shows the positions of the pick-up roller, the paper feed clutch sleeve, and the paper feed latch in the initial state without pressing the COPY button after lighting the ready lamp. The paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutch sleeve.
5) At this time, the paper is fed passed the paper entry detection switch (PPD1), and detected by it. After about 0.15 sec from detection of paper by PPD1, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on so that the clutch sleeve projection comes into contact with the paper feed latch to stop the pick-up roller. Then the pick-up roller rotates for about 0.15 sec so that the lead edge of the paper is evenly pressed on the resist roller, preventing against skew feeding.
2) When the COPY button is pressed, the main drive motor starts rotating to drive each drive gear. The pick-up drive gear also is driven at that time. Since, however, the paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutch sleeve, rotation of the drive gear is not transmitted to the pick-up roller, which does not rotate therefore.
PFS ON
RRS OFF
PFS OFF
RRS OFF
6) To release the resist roller, the tray paper feed solenoid and the resist solenoid are turned on by the paper start signal to disengage the resist start latch from the clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the resist drive gear to the resist roller shaft. Thus the paper is transported by the resist roller. 7) After the resist roller starts rotating, the paper is passed through the pre-transfer guide to the transfer section. Images are transferred on the paper, which is separated from the OPC drum by the drum curve and the separation section.
3) After about 0.1 sec from when the main motor start rotating, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on for a moment. This disengages the paper feed latch from the projection of the clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the pick-up drive gear to the paper feed roller shaft, rotating the pick-up roller to feed the paper.
PFS OFF
PFS RRS OFF OFF
RRS ON
4) After more than half rotation of the pick-up roller, the paper feed latch is brought in contact with a notch on the clutch sleeve, stopping rotation of the pick-up roller. AR-208S/208D
8) The paper separated from the drum is passed through the fusing paper guide, the heat roller (fusing section), POD (paper out detector) to the copy tray.
(2)
Manual multi paper feed operation
1) Before paper feed operation, the manual paper feed solenoid (MPFS) is turned OFF as shown in the figure below.
3) When pawl C of the manual paper feed clutch sleeve is engaged with the manual feed latch, the manual feed stopper falls and the manual take-up roller rises. At that time, the manual paper feed roller is rotating.
A C
OFF MPFS
2) When the PRINT button is pressed, the manual paper feed solenoid (MPFS) turns on to disengage the manual paper feed latch. A from the manual paper feed clutch sleeve A, rotating the manual paper feed roller and the manual take-up roller. At the same time, the manual paper feed stopper opens and the manual take-up roller is pressed to the surface of the paper to start paper feeding.
ON MPFS
4) The lead edge of the transported paper is pressed on the resist roller by the transport roller. Then the paper is stopped temporarily to allow synchronization with the lead edge of the image on the OPC drum. From this point, the operation is the same as the paper feed operation from the tray. (Refer to A-5 - 8.) 5) The solenoid turns off to close the gate and return to the initial state.
C A
C
ON MPFS
AR-208S/208D
OFF MPFS
(3)
Conditions of occurrence of paper misfeed
C. Operational descriptions
Time chart (Tray feed) Document set
a. When the power is turned on: PPD or POD is ON when the power is turned on. b. Copy operation a b PPD1 jam PPD2 jam PPD1 does not turn off within 4 sec after turning on the resist roller. PPD2 is off immediately after turning on the resist roller. PPD2 does not turn off within 1.2 sec after turning off the resist roller. POD does not turn on within 2.9 sec after turning on the resist roller. POD does not turn off within 1.5 sec - 2.7 sec after turning off PPD2.
SPID ON
Document set sensor
Document feed unit lamp ON
POD jam
PSW ON
Copy start The scanner is shifted to the exposure position. (SPF side)
MIRM rotation (Copier side)
6. RSPF section
A. Outline
The RSPF (Reverse Single Path Feeder) is installed to the AR208D / AR-208S as a standard provision, and it automatically copies up to 50 sheets of documents of a same size. (Only one set of copies)
MM rotation
Main motor rotation
SPFM rotation
SPF motor rotation
CPFS ON
Paper feed SPUS ON Document feed
PPD ON
RRC ON
Synchronization Paper transport
SPPD ON
Document transport sensor Document transport
B. Document transport path and basic composition

1 2 3 4 5
(Transfer)
(Exposure)
(Fusing)
SRJD ON
POD ON
(Document exit)
(Paper exit)
In the zooming mode, the magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction (paper transport direction) is adjusted by changing the document transport speed.
10
1 3 5 7 9 Pickup roller Paper empty sensor Paper sensor Lower transport roller Paper exit sensor 2 4 6 8 10
98
7 6
Separation roller Upper transport roller PS roller Reverse self-weight gate Paper exit roller
PSW MRMT SPF M CL SPUS SPPD SCANST SRVC SRJD MAIN M CPFS1 RRS PPD1 PPD2 POD
1200msec
560msec
AR-208S/208D
D. Cases where a document jam is caused

1) The SPPD is ON when turning ON the power. 2) The SPPD does not turn ON for 4.0sec from starting document feed. (in 100% copy) 3) The SPPD does not turn OFF for 4.7sec after detecting turning ON of the SPPD. (100% copy) 4) The RSPF cover or the OC cover is opened during document transportation. 5) The SRJD is ON when the power is turned ON. 6) The SRJD is not turned ON for 2.4sec from release of PS in paper feed from the document set position. (100% copy) 7) The SRJD is not turned OFF for 1.6sec from completion of document scan in the case of complete document exit. (100% copy)
E. RSPF open/close detection (book document detection)

RSPF open/close detection (book document) detection is performed by detecting the interval between the reference lines on the white Mylar attached to the paper exit guide (document scanning section) by the scanner (CCD) and detecting the varied quantity.
B A
Reference line
(Floating) (White Mylar) Reference line
(CCD)
B A
A - B = Varied quantity of pixels (pixel)
Note: When replacing the carriage unit, be sure to execute TC4106. If TC41-06 is not executed, the carriage unit may not read the reference line on the white Mylar, preventing the document from being fed.
C. Back copy
Document transport: By switchback operation, the document is sent through the upper transport roller and the PS roller to the exposure section, where the back surface of the document is exposed. The document is sent to the document exit section by the lower transport roller and the paper exit roller. The document is sent to the intermediate tray. (However, it is not discharged completely.) The document is stopped once, and switchback operation is performed. The document is sent through the upper transport roller and the PS roller and the exposure section (without being exposed) to the document exit section. The document is discharged to the document exit tray. Paper transport: Switchback operation is performed. The paper is sent through the upper side of the gate section and the duplex transport section and the PS roller, and the images on the back surface are transferred. The paper is sent through the fusing section and discharged to the paper exit tray.
7. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/ document transport (Duplex model)

A. Initial state
Set duplex documents on the document tray. Set paper on the cassette. (In the duplex mode, the manual feed tray cannot be selected.)
B. Front copy
Document transport: The document feed roller feeds the document from the paper feed roller to the PS roller. The document is exposed in the exposure section, and transported to the document exit section by the lower transport roller and the paper exit roller. The document is transported to the paper exit tray. (However, it is not discharged completely.) The document is stopped once, and then switchback operation is performed. (To the back copy) Paper transport: The paper is passed through the paper feed roller and the PS roller, and the images on the front surface are transferred. The paper is passed through the fusing section and the lower side of the gate section to the paper exit tray side. (However, it is not discharged completely.) The paper is stopped once, and switchback operation is performed. (To the back copy)
AR-208S/208D
Rotation copy mode: The front and the back are in upside down each other. Copy mode without rotation: The front and the back are not in upside down.
8. Shifter
Shift width: 2.5cm The offset function by the shifter is turned ON/OFF by the user program. According to the setting, offset operation is performed for every job. (Default: ON)
AR-208S/208D
[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

Before disassembly, be sure to disconnect the power cord for safety. 1. Do not disconnect or connect the connector and the harness during the machine is powered. Especially be careful not to disconnect or connect the harness between the MCU PWB and the LSU (MCU PWB: CN20) during the machine is powered. (If it is disconnected or connected during the machine is powered, the IC inside the LSU will be destroyed.) 2. To disconnect the harness after turning on the power, be sure to turn off the power and wait for at least 10 sec before disconnection. (Note that a voltage still remains immediately after turning off the power.) The disassembly and assembly procedures are described for the following sections: 1. High voltage section 2. Operation panel section 3. Optical section 4. Fusing section 5. Tray paper feed/transport section 6. Manual paper feed section 7. Rear frame section 8. Power section 9. DV unit section 10. Duplex motor section (AR-208D only) 11. Reverse roller section (AR-208D only) 12. RSPF section
2) Remove the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum. (Note) Dispose the drum fixing plate which was removed.
LO C K
(2)
(3)
3) Check the cleaning blade and the red felt for no damage. If there is any damage, execute all procedures from item 5) and later. If there is no damage, execute the procedure of item 12). 4) Remove the main charger. (When uneven charging occurs, clean the screen grid and the sawteeth with an air blower.)
1. High voltage section

A. List
No. 1 2 3 Part name Ref. Drum Transfer charger unit Charger wire
B. Drum replacement
1) Remove the drum cover. (4 Lock Tabs)
AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 1
5) Remove the cleaning blade. Note: Dispose the cleaning blade which was removed. If a cleaning error occurs, replace the cleaning blade. (Recommendable replacement cycle: Every 25K)
9) Attach the felt.
: Check while pressing the blade.

Cleaning blade
Moquette R
0 0.3 mm
0 0.3 mm Moquette F
0.2 0.5 mm
Sub blade 0 0.5 mm
0 0.5 mm
Cleaning blade Moquette R Moquette F
6) Clean the cleaning section and the waste toner pipe to remove waste toner completely with a vacuum cleaner. 7) Remove the felt and duplex tape completely. Note: Be careful not to scratch or bend the sub blade. 8) Attach the cleaning blade. Securely insert the plate section of the cleaning blade into the unit and fix it with a screw. Do not touch the cleaning blade rubber with your hand. When attaching the cleaning blade, press the cleaning blade in the arrow direction and attach.
Sub blade Be careful not to allow the moquette to cover the sub blade.
Example of NG
Attach the mocket with slightly pressing section A of the cleaning blade. Do not touch the tip of the cleaning blade. Do not put the mocket under the cleaning blade. Do not put the mocket on the sub blade. Do not press the sub blade with the mocket. If the moquette F/R is deformed or damaged, replace it. (Recommendable replacement cycle: Every 25K) 10) Attach the main charger. Securely set the MC holder on the projection of the process frame. Securely insert two projections of the MC holder into the groove in the process frame. When attaching the MC holder ass'y, be careful not to make contact with the cleaning blade.
0.2 0.5 mm
11) Attach the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum. Apply grease to the inside of the photoconductor drum. (Dia. 2)
2) Push up the lock pawls (2 positions) of the side cover, and remove the transfer charger.
Lock pawl rear
1)
2)
Attach the drum from (b). (Prevention against the sub blade edge breakage) Attach the drum so that its position with the sub blade is as shown. 12) Attach the drum cover. Note: After attaching the drum cover, do not make a copy. When attaching the drum cover, engage the detection gear 20T rib with the 30T gear rib, and attach the drum cover to the process frame. 13) Insert the process unit into the machine until it is fully engaged.
Transfer charger
1)
Lock pawl rear
D. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
C. Disassembly procedure (Transfer charger unit)

1) Press the side cover open/close button and open the side cover.
E. TC unit cleaning
1) Remove the charger cleaner from the manual paper feed unit.
1)
1) 2)
2) Clean the TC front guide and the TC holder with alcohol.
F. Charger wire replacement

1) Remove the TC cover and remove the screw. 2) Remove the spring and remove the charger wire. 3) Install a new charger wire by reversing the procedures (1) and (2). At that time, be careful of the following items. The rest of the charger wire must be within 1.5mm. Refer to Fig.1 The spring hook section (charger wire winding section) must be in the range of the projection section. Be careful not to twist the charger wire.
3)
3) Set the charger cleaner to the transfer unit, and move it reciprocally a few times in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure below.
1)
3)
4)
Charger wire
1)
2)
2) 1)
1mm
Protrusion
1.5mm Fig.1
2. Operation panel section
A. List
No. 1 2 Part name Ref. Operation panel unit Operation PWB
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Open the side door, and Open the front cover.
1)
2)
2) Remove the screws (4 pcs.), the harness, and the operation panel unit.
3. Optical section
A. List
NO. 1 2 3 Part name Ref. Copy lamp unit Copy lamp Lens unit
1)
1)
1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet cover.
1) 2)
1) 1)
3) Remove four screws, and remove the operation cabinet. 4) Disconnect the connector. 5) Remove eight screws, and remove the operation PWB.
2)
2) 3) 1) 2) 5) 5) 5) 2) 5) 1)
1)
2) Remove the connector and the clamp, and remove the RSPF unit.
4)
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure
4) 3)
2) 1)
3) Remove five screws, remove the operation unit, and disconnect the connector. 4) Remove the right cabinet. 5) Remove the left cabinet. 6) Remove the rear cover. 7) Remove the table glass.
11) Remove the screw, and remove the rod stopper. 12) Remove the rod.
3)
1) 6) 5) 1) 7) 1) 3) 4) 2) 1)
2)
13) Lift the rear side of the carriage, remove the belt and the connector, and remove the carriage.
1) 1)
8) Move the carriage to the position indicated on the figure. 9) Loosen the screw which is fixing the tension plate. 10) Move the tension plate in the arrow direction to release the tension, and remove the belt.
Note: When replacing the carriage unit, be sure to execute TC4106. If TC41-06 is not executed, the carriage unit may not read the reference line on the white Mylar, preventing the document from being fed.
4)
1)
2) 3)
2)
4) 3)
1)
CCD core
1) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the CCD PWB of the carriage unit. 2) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the duplex tape on the back surface of the carriage unit. Clean and remove oil and dirt from the attachment surface. 3) Pass the CCD-MCU harness through the square hole in the base plate. 4) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the base plate with duplex tape. 5) Attach two cable fixing sheets to fix the CCD-MCU harness to the base plate. 6) Pass the core through the CCD-MCU harness and fix the core. 7) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the MCU PWB.
4. Fusing section
A. List
No. 1 2 3 4 5 Part name Ref. Thermistor PPD2 sensor Heater lamp Pressure roller Heat roller
1) Remove the connectors (3 pcs.) of the rear cabinet. 2) Open the side cover, remove two screws, and remove the fusing unit.
Note: Attach the FCC to the base plate securely with duplex tape to prevent against coming loose.
1)
3)
2)
Note: Attach the FCC to fit with the marking line.
Marking line.
2)
3) Cut the binding band, remove the screw, and remove the thermistor.
1)
2)
Thermistor
3)
4) Remove the screw and remove the U-turn guide.
7) Remove the plate spring on the right and remove the heater lamp.
1)
2)
1)
2)
Pressure roller section disassembly 5) Remove three screws, remove the fusing cover lower on the right side, and open the heat roller section.
Heater lamp
2) 3) 4) 6)
8) Remove the spring, and remove the upper separation pawls (3 pcs.).
3) 5) 1)
5)
6)
2)
6) Remove the screw and remove the PPD2 sensor.
1)
1) 2)
PPD2 sensor
9) Remove the E-ring and remove the reverse gate.
3)
1) 2)
10) Remove the spring, and remove the lower separation pawls (4 pcs.).
Heat roller disassembly (Continued from procedure (4).) 5) Remove screws, remove the fusing cover, and open the heat roller section.
2) 2) 2) 2)
3)
2)
1)
1)
2)
3)
11) Remove the pressure release levers on the right and the left sides.
6) Remove the C-ring and the fusing bearing, and remove the heat roller.
1) 2) 3)
Heat roller
1)
1)
7) Remove the parts from the heat roller. 12) Remove the pressure roller, the pressure bearing, and the spring. Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with an asterisk (). Grease: "JFE552" UKOG-0235FCZZ Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with 1. Grease: "JFE552" UKOG-0235FCZZ
Pressure roller
1 3) 2) 1 1)
1) 3) 2) 1) 2) 3)
8) Remove two screws and remove the thermo unit. Note: The set temperature of the thermostat differs from that of the current model. Current model AR-208S/208D Temperature 210C 230C
2) Remove two screws, and remove the hinge guide R.
1)
3) Remove the fan duct and disconnect the connector. (2 positions) 4) Remove six screws, and remove the scanner unit.
5)
5) 3) 5) 1)
6) 5) 5)
2)
2)
4)
3)
4) 1)
5)
5. Tray paper feed/transport section

A. List
No. 1 2 3 4 5 Part name Ref. Paper holding arm PPD1 sensor PWB LSU unit Intermediate frame unit Paper feed roller
5) Disconnect the connector from the MCU PWB. 6) Disengage the pawls (2 positions), and remove the sensor PWB.
3)
1) Remove the paper holding arm. Remove the arm holder from the main unit, and remove the holder from the arm.
2)
1)
2) 2) 1)
3)
4)
7) Remove the screw, and open the upper paper guide.
12) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the speaker unit. (When the AR-FX13 is installed)
1) 1) 2)
13) Remove the connector. 14) Remove four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the AR-FX13 is installed)
8) Remove the roller, and remove the belt.
2)
1)
2)
2)
1)
3)
9) Disengage the pawl, and remove the roller knob. 10) Disengage the pawl, and shift the pulley and the bearing.
2)
2)
15) Disconnect the connectors. 16) Remove three screws, and remove the MCU PWB.
3)
2)
1)
1) 4) 3)
11) Remove the paper exit roller, and remove the belt, the pulley, and the bearing.
2) 2) 2)
1)
1) 2)
1)
17) Remove two screws and remove the toner motor.
20) Remove five screws and the grounding wire, and remove the main drive unit.
2)
2)
1) 1)
1) 1)
1)
18) Remove three screws, and remove the DUP motor unit and the belt.
CAUTION:Attach the gears securely

21) Remove the parts as shown below, and remove the pressure release solenoid and the paper feed solenoid.
1) 2) 1)
19) Remove the harness guide.
3)
3)
4) 2)
1)
1) 4) 2) 3)
22) Remove the screw, slide the left cabinet to the left to detach it. Remove each pawl, and remove the paper exit tray.
25) Remove four screws, and remove the lower paper guide unit. [Note for installation] Fit the lower paper guide hole (a) with the shifter gear hole (b) so that the black resin (c) of the shifter unit can be checked.
3)
c b
1)
1)
1) 1)
2)
5) 1) 2) 4)
23) Remove two screws and remove the fusing connector. 24) Remove five screws and the connector, and lift the intermediate frame unit to remove.
3) 3) 3)
26) Disengage the pawl, and remove the pulley. 27) Shift and remove the shifter unit.
3)
3)
4)
2)
4)
3) 1)
2)
2)
1)
28) Remove the screw, and remove the grounding plate and the gear. 29) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing, and remove the shifter roller.
1)
Note: When assembling, turn it to the right and attach.
2)
3)
32) Remove the screw and the E-ring, and remove the PS semi-circular earth plate and the PS roller unit. 30) Put the lower paper guide unit upside down, remove two screws, and remove the shifter motor.
1)
33) Remove the E-ring and remove the spring clutch from the PS roller unit.
5)
2)
4)
PS roller unit Use grease of Floil FG40H only to apply to this section.
4)
31) Remove four screws, and remove the LSU.

1) 1) 1)
PS semi-circuler PS semi-circular earthplate earth plate

2)
1)
3)
2)
34) Remove three screws and remove the TC front paper guide.
36) Remove two E-rings and remove the paper feed roller. 37) Remove three E-rings and remove the clutch unit.
1)
5)
Back
Clutch unit
4)
2)
Paper feed roller
4)
3)
Front
35) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the PPD1 sensor PWB.
1)
1)
2)
2)
38) Remove the semi-circular roller unit. 39) Remove the semi-circular rubber.
2)
1)
1)
6. Manual paper feed section

A. List
No. 1 2 3 4 Part name Ref. Manual transport roller Cassette detection switch PPD1 sensor PWB Side door detection unit
3) Remove three screws and remove the multi paper feed upper frame.
1)
1)
Multi unit
1) Remove the screw and remove the multi upper cover.
1)
2)
2)
4) Remove two screws and remove the multi feed bracket unit from the multi paper feed upper frame.
2)
1)
2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit.
1)
2)
2) 1)
Back
Wire treatment
5) Remove three E-rings and remove the manual paper feed roller B9.
7) Cut the binding band and remove the multi paper feed solenoid.
1) 1) 1)
1)
3)
2)
Multi paper feed solenoid
3)
2)
L O CK
T O
6) Remove the pick-up roller.
D. Pressure plate holder attachment

1)
1) Attach the pressure plate holder so that the resin section is not covered with the seal M1-N.
Seal M1-N
2)
Attachment reference
Pressure plate holder
Attachment reference
7. Rear frame section

A. List
No. 1 2 3 4 5 Part name Ref. FAX PWB (When the AR-FX13 installed) Mirror motor Main motor Exhaust fan motor Main PWB
7) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the exhaust fan motor. Note: Be careful of the installing directions of the fan. Attach it so that the blowing direction faces outside.
1)
1) Remove the rear cabinet. 2) Remove the connector. 3) Remove four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the AR-FX13 is installed)
3)
2)
2)
2)
Blowing direction
8) Disconnect the connectors. 9) Remove five screws, and remove the MCU PWB.
1)
2) 1)
3) 2)
2)
4) Disconnect the connector. 5) Remove two screws, and remove the scanner motor.
2)
1)
3) 1) 2)
3)
2) 1) 2)
2)
6) Remove two screws and one harness, and remove the main motor.
3)
1)
2)
8. Power section
A. List
No. 1 Part name Ref. Power PWB
2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV cover.
1) 2)
1) Disconnect each connector. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth line. 3) Remove two screws, and remove the power PWB unit.
4) 1) 2) 3) 1) 1) 1) 1)
3) Remove the used developer.
5) 4)
4) Supply new developer.
9. DV unit section
A. Developer
1) Remove the screw, slide the pawl to the right side, and remove the TN guide.
B. DV seal
1) Peel off the old DV seal. 2) Clean the attachment surface with alcohol.
1)
3) Attach the new DV seal to the reference position.

DV side seal F
A C
DV side seal R
D
0.5
B 0 X
C 0.5 0.5 D 0
2)
0.5 B 0
Bump
B
Magnification ratio: 200%
X-X
C. DV blade
1) Peel off the old DV blade. 2) Clean the attachment surface with alcohol. 3) Attach the new DV blade to the reference position.
A
E. DV sensor
1) Remove the Mylar. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV sensor. * Clean the sensor (A) section.
1)
B
DV blade IC DV-BOX AS
0.5
2) 3) 2)
B
D. DV doctor
1) Remove the screw, and remove the DV doctor. * Clean the edge (A) section.
10. Duplex motor section (AR-208D only)

A. List
1) A 2) 1)
No. 1
Part name Ref. Duplex motor
1) Remove the rear cabinet. 2) Remove two screws. 3) Remove the Duplex motor cover. 4) Remove the Duplex motor.
Note for installation 1) Insert the DG check gauge as shown in the figure. 2) After checking, install the doctor gap and fix it with a screw. * Apply screw lock to the screw tightening section as shown in the figure below.
MG-ROL
DG check gauge
C DG sect F/R :1.5 ion DG se 5 :1. ctio 0.15 5 n 0.1 0
FRONT
* After checking the DG, apply screw lock.
3
REAR
1 2
20
F
DG check gauge
10
10
110
20
Note: When reassembling, be sure to engage the Duplex motor gear with the belt on the main body side.
DG check position
DG check gauge DG check gauge
11. Reverse roller section (AR-208D only)

A. List
No. 1 Part name Ref. Reverse roller
12. RSPF section

A. Front cabinet, rear cabinet
(1) Open the upper door unit.
1) Remove four screws 2) Remove the spring, and the earth wire 3) Remove the reverse unit.
(2)
Front cabinet and rear cabinet removal
1) Remove two screws. 2) Disengage the five pawls. 3) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet.
3 3 2 2 1
3 1
4) Bend the reverse roller and remove it.
2 2 1
B. Upper door unit

1
1) Release the shaft on the front side. 2) Remove the upper door unit.
1 2
C. Document tray unit

1) Release the shaft on the front side. 2) Remove the tray unit.
(2)
Paper exit roller removal
1) Remove the E-ring. 2) Slide the bearing. 3) Remove the paper exit roller. 4) Remove the E-ring. 5) Remove the bearing.
4 2 5
1
Note for reassembly Use care so that the paper exit Mylar in not pinched between the paper exit roller and the follower roller.
F. Drive unit
(1) Transport unit removal
1) Disconnect four connectors. 2) Remove the harness from the clamp. 3) Remove the snap band. 4) Remove one screw. 5) Remove the earth wire. 6) Remove one screw. 7) Disconnect the RSPF harness.
D. Upper door open/close sensor

1) Disconnect one connector. 2) Remove the upper door open/close sensor.
2 1 3 1 1 5
1 4
6 1 2
E. Reverse clutch, paper exit roller

(1) Reverse clutch removal
7
1) Disconnect one connector. 2) Remove the resin E-ring. 3) Remove the reverse clutch.
1 2
Note for reassembly Attach the stopper of the reverse clutch along with the rib on the motor mounting plate. AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 22
8) Remove four screws. 9) Remove the transport unit.
G. Shutter solenoid
(1)
8 9
Shutter solenoid unit removal
8 8
1) Remove the harness from the edge saddle. 2) Remove one screw. 3) Remove the shutter solenoid unit.
3
Note for reassembly Before assembly, be sure to check that the harness is passed through the rib. Arrange the RSPF harness to the outside of the base tray so that it is nit pinched before assembly. Note for reassembly Install the paper feed solenoid under the state where the projection of the paper feed planet arm is lower than the paper feed solenoid lever.
(2)
Drive unit removal
1) Remove three screws. 2) Remove the drive unit.
(2)
Shutter solenoid removal
1) Remove the paper feed solenoid spring from the shutter solenoid. 2) Remove the paper feed solenoid lever.
2 1
(3)
Drive motor removal
1) Remove the gear. 2) Remove two screws. 3) Remove the drive motor. Note for reassembly When assembling, use care so that the paper feed solenoid spring does not extend out of the paper feed solenoid lever.
3 2 1
Note for reassembly Connect the connectors according to the arrow indication marked on the motor mounting plate.
H. Pickup roller, take-up roller

(1) Paper feed unit removal
1) Remove the E-ring. 2) Side the bearing. 3) Remove the stopper arm. 4) Release the paper feed shaft pressure release spring. 5) Remove the paper feed unit. 6) Remove the paper feed shaft release arm.
(4)
Pickup roller removal
1) Disengage one pawl. 2) Remove the pickup drive gear from the pickup roller.
3 2
1 5 1
I. Paper empty sensor

4
3 2
(1)
Paper feed PG unit removal
1) Remove the harness. 2) Remove three screws. 3) Lift the front side, and remove the paper feed PG unit.
(2)
Parts removal
1) Remove the E-ring. 2) Remove the resin E-ring. 3) Slide the shaft. 4) Remove the spring pin.
3 2
4 3 1
(2) (3) Paper feed roller removal
Paper feed PG support plate removal
1) Remove one screw. 2) Slide and remove the paper feed PG support plate. 1) Pull out the shaft. 2) Remove the clutch boss and the clutch spring from the pickup roller.
2 1
(3)
Paper empty sensor removal
(3)
Scan plate removal
1) Disconnect one connector. 2) Remove the paper empty sensor.
1) Remove the scan plate.
2 1
(4)
PS roller removal
J. PS roller
(1) Parts removal
1) Remove the gear. 2) Remove the pulley. 3) Remove the belt.
1) Remove the PS roller.
K. Upper transport roller

(1)
3 1
Parts removal
1) Remove the gear. 2) Remove the upper transport release arm. 3) Remove the bearing. 4) Remove the E-ring. 5) Remove the bearing.
(2)
Parts removal
1) Remove one screw. 2) Remove the earth wire. 3) Remove the E-ring. 4) Remove the bearing. 5) Open the scan plate.
5 4
2 4 1 4 3 5
2 3
Note for reassembly Use care so that the rib on the upper transport release arm catches the guide.
Note for reassembly Pass the earth wire through the hole to the outside of the frame, then install parts. AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 25
(2)
Upper transport roller removal
(2)
Lower transport roller removal
1) Remove the upper transport roller.
1) Remove the E-ring. 2) Remove the gear. 3) Remove the bearing. 4) Remove the lower transport roller.
L. Paper sensor
1) Disconnect one connector. 2) Remove the paper sensor.
3 1 2
N. Paper exit sensor

(1)
2 1 1
OC mat removal
1) Remove the OC mat.
M. Lower transport roller

(1) Reverse self-weight gate removal
1) Remove the reverse self-weight gate.
(2)
Paper exit sensor removal
1) Disconnect one connector. 2) Remove the paper exit sensor.
[9] ADJUSTMENTS
1. Optical section
A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment
The copy magnification ratio must be adjusted in the main scanning direction and in the sub scanning direction. To adjust, use TC 4801.
5) Calculate the main scanning direction magnification ratio. Main scanning direction magnification ratio = Copy image dimensions Original dimension X 100 (%)
(When a 100mm scale is used as the original.) Original (Scale)

mm 1/2mm
HARDENED STAINLESS
10
20
100
110
120
JAPAN
130
140
150
Shizuoka
(1)
Outline
Paper feed direction
mm 1/2mm
JAPAN
The main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment is made manually. The adjustment is made by manual key operations. (The zoom data register set value is changed for adjustment.) The magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted by changing the carriage (scanner) scanning speed.
HARDENED STAINLESS
10
20
100
110
120
130
140
150
Shizuoka
Reference
Comparison point
Copy
110
(2)
Main scanning/sub scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment

6) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range. If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures. 7) Execute TC 48-01 to select the main scanning direction copy magnification ratio adjustment mode. To select the adjustment mode, use the [/] key. Mode Main scan direction magnification ratio OC mode sub scan direction magnification ratio Display Default LED item value F-R 50 PRINT mode lamp SCAN 50 SCAN mode lamp
a. Cases when the adjustment is required 1) When the main PWB is replaced. 2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. 3) When "U2" trouble occurs. 4) When repairing or replacing the optical section. b. Necessary tools Scale c. Main scanning direction adjustment procedure 1) Set the scale vertically on the document table. (Use a long scale for precise adjustment.)
8) Enter the new set value of main scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the [START] key. 9) Change the set value and repeat the adjustment until the ratio is within the specified range. When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is changed by 0.1%. d. Sub scanning direction adjustment procedure 1) Set the scale on the document table as shown below. (Use a long scale for precise adjustment.)
2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%. 3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper. 4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.
AR-208S/208D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 1
2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%. 3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper. 4) Measure the length of the copied scale image. 5) Calculate the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio using the formula below. = Copy image dimensions Original dimension X 100 (%) Mode
110
Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) (*) Print center offset TRAY2 (2nd cassette paper feed) Print center offset MFT (Manual paper feed) SIDE2 2nd print center offset (Main cassette paper feed)
Display Default LED item TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp 50 COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp 50 COPY mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp PRINT mode lamp Main cassette lamp
TC
50-10
50
Original (Scale)
mm 1/2mm
JAPAN
HARDDENCD STAINLESS
10
20
100
110
120
130
140
150
Shizuoka
The modes can be selected by pressing [/] key. (*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
Paper feed direction
mm 1/2mm
10
20
100
110
120
JAPAN
HARDDENCD STAINLESS
130
140
150
Shizuoka
* In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as 1to2/Long Edge from OC regardless of duplex setting.
(1)
Lead edge adjustment
Reference
Comparison point
Copy
1) Set a scale to the center of the paper lead edge guide as shown below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper or OC cover.
6) Check that the actual copy magnification ratio is within the specified range. (100 1.0%). If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures. 7) Execute TC 48-01 to select the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio adjustment mode. To select the adjustment mode, use the [/] key. (SCAN mode lamp ON) 8) Enter the new set value of sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the [START] key. Repeat procedures 1) - 8) until the sub scanning direction actual copy magnification ratio in 100% copying is within the specified range. When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ration is changed by 0.1%.
B. Image position adjustment

The employed test commands and the contents are as follows: Mode Print start position (Main cassette paper feed) (*) Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed) Print start position (Manual paper feed) Display Default LED item TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp MFT 50 COPY mode lamp Manual paper 50-01 feed lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp TC 2) Execute TC 50 - 01 3) Set the print start position (A: AE mode lamp/COPY mode lamp ON), the lead edge void amount (B: TEXT mode lamp/PRINT mode lamp ON), the scan start position (C: PHOTO mode lamp/ SCAN mode lamp) to 1, and make a copy of the scale at 100%. 4) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale. Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.) When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50) 5) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position. Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.) When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is moved to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50). 6) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50) When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is extended by about 0.1mm. (For 25 or less, however, the void amount is regarded as 0.) * The RSPF adjustment is made by adjusting the RSPF image scan start position after OC adjustment.
TRAY2
50
Image lead edge void DEN-A amount Image scan start RRC-A position Image rear edge void DEN-B amount
50 50 50
(Example)
Distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge, H = 5mm Image loss, R = 4mm
Document guide
Center
5mm
Copy paper (A4 or 8 1/2 11)
10mm
2) Execute TC 50-10 to select the print center offset (cassette paper feed) adjustment mode. The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
(2)
Image rear edge void amount adjustment
1) Set a scale to the rear edge section of A4 or 11" x 8 1/2" paper size as shown in the figure below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper.
3) Make a copy and check that the copied center line is properly positioned. The standard value is 0 2mm from the paper center.
(Copy A)
2.0mm or less
Copy image Shift Copy paper folding line
B4 or 8 1/2 14 paper
A4 size rear edge

(Copy B)
2.0mm or less
Copy image Shift (Paper feed direction) Copy paper folding line
2) Execute TC 50 - 01 to select the image rear edge void amount adjustment mode. The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display. 3) Make a copy and measure the void amount of image rear edge.
4) If the measured value is out of the specified range, change the set value and repeat the adjustment procedure. When the set value is increased by 1, the copy image is shifted by 0.1mm toward the rear frame. For the manual paper feed, change the manual paper feed adjustment mode and perform the similar procedures. Since the document center offset is automatically adjusted by the CCD which scan the reference lines (F/R) on the back of document guide, there is no need to adjust manually.
Void amount (Standard value: 2 - 3mm)
Scale image Paper rear edge
2. Copy density adjustment

A. Copy density adjustment timing
The copy density adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
4) If the measurement value is out of the specified range, change the set value and repeat the adjustment procedure. The default value is 50.
When maintenance is performed. When the developing bias/grid bias voltage is adjusted. When the optical section is cleaned. When a part in the optical section is replaced. When the optical section is disassembled. When the OPC drum is replaced. When the main control PWB is replaced. When the EEPROM on the main control PWB is replaced. When the memory trouble (U2) occurs.
(3)
Center offset adjustment
1) Set the self-made test chart for the center position adjustment so that its center line is aligned with the center mark of the document guide. Test chart for the center position adjustment. Draw a line at the center of A4 or 8 1/2" x 11" paper in the paper transport direction.
B. Note for copy density adjustment

1) Arrangement before execution of the copy density adjustment Clean the optical section. Clean or replace the charger wire. Check that the voltage at the high voltage section and the developing bias voltage are in the specified range.
C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment

One of the following test charts: UKOG-0162FCZZ, UKOG-0089CSZZ, KODAK GRAY SCALE B4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper The user program AE setting should be "3."
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
(2)
Perform the adjustment in each mode.
1) Execute TC 46-01 (300dpi). To adjust in 600dpi, execute TC 4602. 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure mode select key. Set the exposure level to 3 (center) for all adjustment. (Except for the auto mode.)
TEXT | | | | |
(1) Exposure mode, level display
Test chart comparison table UKOG0162FCZZ DENSITY No. UKOG0089CSZZ DENSITY No. KODAK GRAY SCALE
(2) Mode select key

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W Adjustment mode Auto mode Text mode 1 2 3 4 19 A Photo mode Text T/S mode Auto T/S mode Display item AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT TSAE LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Sharp gray chart adjustment level "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied.
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5 1.9
D. Features of copy density adjustment

For the copy density adjustment, the image data shift function provided in the image process LSI is used. List of the adjustment modes Auto Mode Manual Mode Photo Mode Manual T/S mode T/S Auto mode Brightness 1 step only Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 1 step only
3) Make a copy. Check the adjustment level (shown in the above table) of the exposure test chart (Sharp Gray Scale). Sharp Gray Scale adjustment level Non toner save mode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
Slightly copied. Not copied.
E. Copy density adjustment procedure

The copy density can be adjusted in 300dpi or in 600dpi. Main code 46 Sub code 01 02 Resolution for copy density adjustment 300dpi 600dpi
Toner save mode
10
Slightly copied. Not copied.
For selection of modes, use the copy mode select key.
(1)
Test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) setting
(When too bright): Decrease the value displayed on the copy quantity display. (When too dark): Increase the value displayed on the copy quantity display.
1) Place the test chart so that its edge is aligned with the A4 (Letter) reference line on the document table. Then place a A4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper on the test chart and close the document cover.
* The value can be set in the range of 1 - 99.
White paper
Test chart
3. High voltage adjustment

A. Main charger (Grid bias)
Note: Use a digital multi meter with internal resistance of 10M or more measurement. After adjusting the grid LOW output, adjust the HIGH output. Do not reverse the sequence. Procedures 1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC700V. 2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN11-3 (GRID) of high voltage section of the power PWB and set the negative side to the frame ground (power frame). 3) Execute TC 8-02. (The main charger output is supplied for 30 sec in the grid voltage HIGH output mode.) 4) Adjust the control volume (VRG1) so that the output voltage is 580 12V.
4. Duplex adjustment
A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory for duplex copying
This step adjusts the front surface printing (odd-number pages of a document set) in the S-D mode copying and the leading edge position of an image on even-number pages in the D-S mode. That is, it covers the adjustment of the second surface printing mode (image loss at the front edge of an image) in which image data is once stored in memory. The image data is read, starting from its front end in the document delivery direction (Reference direction of document setting in the OC mode)and stored in memory. This stored image data is printed starting at the printing start position, in the order of last-stored data to the first-stored data. In other words, the front edge image loss of the image can be adjusted by changing the document read end position. (Adjustment procedure) 1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of a sheet of A4 white paper or letter paper)
5 10
VRG1
2) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below, in the S-D mode and the D-S mode.
Scale (S-D mode)
Scale (D-S mode)
B. DV bias check
Note: A digital multi meter with internal resistance of 1G must be use for correct check. The adjustment volume is locked, and no adjustment can be made. Procedures 1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC500V. 2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN-10-1 (DV BIAS) and set the negative side to the frame ground (power frame). 3) Execute TC 25-01 to output the developing bias for 30sec, and check that the output is 4008V. 3) Execute test command 50-18. Mode OC memory reverse output position RSPF memory reverse output position Display item OC SPF Default 50 50 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp
VRDV
Select the RSPF memory reverse output position, and press [START] key to make a copy. Adjust the setting so that the front edge image loss is less than 4.0 mm in the RSPF mode. An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in image loss.
Front edge of paper
The front edge of the scale on test chart
Void area
less than 4 mm
5 10
2) Set the test chart on the document glass as shown below.
Document guide
The trailing edge has a scale
2nd printing surface where scale is printed (lower side)
B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode

This is the adjustment of the first surface printing mode (rear end void) in duplex copying. In a duplex copying operation, the paper is delivered starting from the rear end of the first printing surface. It is therefore necessary to make a void area at the rear end on the first printing surface to prevent paper jam at the fusing part. There are two adjustment modes: 1) Image cut rear end void quantity (RSPF) 50-19 (SCAN mode lamp) The size (length) of a document read from the RSPF is detected, the image at the trailing edge of the first printing surface is cut to make a void area. (The adjustment of void quantity at the time when the cassette paper size is not recognized.) 2) Paper trailing edge void quantity 50-19 (PRINT mode lamp) This adjustment is made when the cassette paper size is recognized. The trailing edge void quantity can be adjusted by changing the trailing edge image laser OFF timing. The paper void quantity should be first adjusted before the image cut trailing edge void quantity (RSPF) is adjusted. The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [/] key. (Adjustment range; 1 99) Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (The paper information is cleared for every copy.) When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased by about 0.1mm. Mode Paper rear edge void amount Print start position (Duplex back surface) Display item DEN-B RRC-D Default 50 50 LED PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp
Table glass
3) Execute test command 50-19 to turn on the PRINT mode lamp and make the printing mode in OC-D mode. Make a copy of the test chart to check the void area of the scale on the image.
Void position to be check
Paper
The trailing edge void on the first printing surface is shown above.
Adjust the setting so that the void area is 4 - 5 mm. An increase in 1 of setting represents 0.1 mm in void area.
(2)
Image cut trailing edge void quantity (RSPF)
1) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below.
* The initial value of duplex setting is 2to2. (Adjustment procedure)
Scale (D-D mode)

2) Execute test command 50-19 to turn on the SCAN mode lamp(on the operation panel) and make the printing mode in the D-D mode. 3) Remove and reinsert the cassette. Note: Make sure to carry out this step before making a copy during this adjustment. 4) Make a copy and check the void area of the scale on the image. Adjust the setting so that the void area is 2 - 4 mm. An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in void area. l Void position to be checked
(1)
Paper trailing edge void quantity
1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of a sheet of A/4 white paper or letter paper)
5. RSPF scan position automatic adjustment

Place a A4 paper (white chart) so that it covers the RSPF scan glass and the OC glass together, and close the RSPF. When test command 53-08 is executed, the current adjustment value is displayed as the initial display. * Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 99. Adjustment unit 1 = about 0.127mm * If the values are kept as the default values, RSPF scan is not performed properly. The front area of the proper scan position may be scanned. In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from the home position to the RSPF scan position with the adjustment value displayed. The RSPF glass cover edge position is calculated from the difference between the RSPF glass cover edge and the OC side document glass CCD output level. If the adjustment is normal, the adjusted value is displayed. If abnormal, the error LED lights up with the current set value displayed. During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again, execution is performed again. Mode RSPF scan position auto adjustment RSPF scan position manual adjustment Operation The operation is similar to test command 46-01. (In MANUAL) OK/ERR display in AUTO <When OK> 53-08 SPF AUTO AUTO 100% ** OK <When ERR> 53-08 SPF AUTO AUTO 100% ** ERR Display item AUTO MANU Default 1 1 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp
6. RSPF mode sub scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment

Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the OC mode adjustment in copying has been completed. 1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a normal copy (100%) on the front and the back surfaces to make a test chart.
Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale in paralled with the edge lines. 2) Set the test chart on the RSPF and make a duplex copy (D-D or D-S) in the normal ratio (100%). 3) Compare the scale image and the actual image. If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures. 4) Execute TC 48-05. 5) The current front surface sub scanning direction magnification ratio correction value is displayed in two digits on the display section. To select SIDE1 and SIDE2, use [/] keys. 6) Enter the set value and press the start key. When adjusting the RSPF, use [2-SIDED COPY] key to select single/duplex after entering the one page print mode, performing 2-page single copy. Mode Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the surface of RSPF document Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the surface of RSPF document Display item SIDE1 Default 50 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp
SIDE2
50
* When there is no document in RSPF, copy is inhibited. <Adjustment specification> Adjustment mode Sub scanning direction magnification ratio (RSPF mode) Spec value At normal: 1.0% TC 48-5 Set value Add 1: 0.1% increase Reduce 1: 0.1% decrease Setting range 1 99
6cm or more is required.
7. Automatic black level correction

a. Cases when the adjustment is required 1) When the main PWB is replaced. 2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. 3) When "U2" trouble occurs. 4) When repairing or replacing the optical section. b. Adjustment procedure Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level adjustment of white balance. When test command 63-02 is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit hexadecimal number. Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the correction document so that the density 10 (black side) comes on the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the plate left center.
10 Chart back surface
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart and calculates the correction value. After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the LCD. * Default: 0 * If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60. c. Operation 1) Initial display 63-02 BLACK LEVEL 0 2) [ENTER/START] Correction start 63-02 BLACK LEVEL EXECUTING... <During canceling - When C/CA is pressed-> After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. THE JOB IS BEING CANCELED. 3) After execution 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** OK 3) In case of an error 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** ERR
[10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES

1. Entering the test command mode
To enter the serviceman test command mode, press the keys as follows: [#] key [*] key [C] key [*] key To cancel the test command mode, press the [CA] key.
2. Key rule
[10KEY]: Entry of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE Selection of an item Setup of an adjustment value in case of test commands for adjustment [/]: Selection of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE Selection of an item [ENTER/START]: Settlement <In case of test commands for print> [ENTER]: Settlement (Without print) [START]: Settlement/Print [C]: (Interrupting operation check) Returns to the upper hierarchy. In case of test command of operation check, terminates the operations. [CA]: Exits from the test command mode. For a test command of adjustment, the display returns to the initial display (00-00).
3. List of test commands

Main Sub Contents code code 1 01 Mirror scan (SCAN CHK) 02 Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display (MHP-SENSOR) 06 Mirror scan aging (SCAN AGING) 2 01 Reversing Single Pass Feeder (RSPF) aging (SPF AGING) 02 RSPF sensor status display (SPF SENSOR) 03 RSPF motor operation check (SPF MOTOR CHK) 08 RSPF paper feed solenoid operation check (SPF SPUS CHK) 09 RSPF reverse solenoid operation check (RSPF SPFS CHK) 3 03 Shifter operation check (SHIFTER CHK) 5 01 Operation panel display check (LCD/LED CHK) 02 Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check (HT LAMP CHK) 03 Copy lamp ON check (C-LAMP CHK) 6 01 Paper feed solenoid (CPFS1, CPFS2, MPFS) operation check (PSOL CHK) 02 Resist roller solenoid (RRS) operation check (RES.R SOL CHK) 7 01 Check of warm-up display and aging with JAM (W-UP/AGING) 06 Interval aging (INTERVAL AGING) 08 Shift to copy with warm-up display (W-UP C-MODE) 8 01 Developing bias output (DVLP BIAS SET.) 02 Main charger output (Grid HIGH) (MHV(H) SET.) 03 Main charger output (Grid LOW) (MHV(L) SET.) 06 Transfer charger output (THV SET.) 9 01 Duplex motor normal rotation check (DPLX ROT.) (AR-208D only) 02 Duplex motor reverse rotation check (DPLX ROT.REV.) (AR-208D only) 04 Duplex motor rotating speed adjustment (DPLX ROT.SPEED) (AR-208D only) 10 Toner motor operation (TONER MOTOR) 14 Cancel of trouble other than U2 (TRBL CANC.) Main Sub Contents code code 16 U2 trouble cancel (U2 TRBL CANC.) 20 01 Maintenance counter clear (M-CNT CLR.) 21 01 Maintenance cycle setting (M-CYCLE) 22 01 Maintenance counter display (M-CNT) 02 Maintenance preset display (M-CNT PRESET) 04 JAM total counter display (JAM TTL CNT) 05 Total counter display (TTL CNT) 06 Developer counter display (DVLP CNT) 08 RSPF counter display (SPF CNT) 11 FAX-related counter display (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 12 Drum counter display (DRUM CNT) 13 CRUM type display (CRUM TYPE) 14 ROM version display (ROM VER.) 16 Duplex counter display (DPLX CNT) (AR-208D only) 17 Copy counter display (COPIES CNT) 18 Printer counter display (PRT.CNT) 19 Scanner mode counter display (S-MODE CNT) 21 Scanner counter display (SCAN CNT) 22 RSPF JAM counter display (S JAM CNT) 24 01 JAM total counter clear (JAM TTL CLR.) 04 RSPF counter clear (SPF CLR.) 05 Duplex counter clear (DPLX CLR.) (AR-208D only) 06 Developer counter clear (DVLP CLR.) 07 Drum counter clear (DRUM CLR.) 08 Copy counter clear (COPIES CLR.) 09 Printer counter clear (PRT.CLR.) 10 FAX counter clear (FAX CLR.) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 13 Scanner counter clear (SCAN CLR.) 14 RSPF JAM total counter clear (S JAM TTL CLR.) 15 Scanner mode counter clear (S-MODE CLR.) 25 01 Main motor operation check (MAIN MOTOR CHK) 10 Polygon motor operation check (LSU CHK)
AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 1
Main Sub Contents code code 26 02 (R)SPF setting (SPF/RSPF) 03 Second cassette setting (2ND TRAY) 04 Main unit duplex setting (DPLX) 06 Destination setting (DESTINATION) 07 Machine conditions check (CPM) 20 Rear edge void setting (END EDGE) 30 CE mark support control ON/OFF (CE MARK) 37 Cancel of stop at developer life over (DVLP LIFE END) 39 Memory capacity check (MEM.CHK) 40 Polygon motor OFF time setting (Time required from completion of printing to turning OFF the motor) (LSU MOTOR OFF) 42 Transfer ON timing control setting (TC ON TIMING) 43 Side void amount setting (SIDE VOID) 54 life correction setting (GAMMA CTRL) 62 Energy-save mode copy lamp setting (C-LAMP E-S) 30 01 Paper sensor status display (P-SENSOR) 41 06 OC cover float detection level adjustment (OC FLOAT LEVEL) 07 OC cover float detection margin setting (OC FLOAT MGN) 43 01 Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy) (FU TEMP) 04 Fusing temperature setting in multi copy (FU TEMP MULTI) 05 Fusing temperature setting in duplex copy (FU TEMP DPLX) (AR-208D only) 14 Fusing start temperature setting (FU TEMP START) 46 01 Copy density adjustment (300dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 300) 02 Copy density adjustment (600dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 600) 12 Density adjustment in the FAX mode (Collective adjustment) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 13 FAX mode density adjustment (normal text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 14 FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 15 FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 18 Image contrast adjustment (300dpi) (GAMMA 300) 19 Exposure mode setting (AE MODE) 20 RSPF exposure correction (EXP.LEVEL SPF) 29 Image contrast adjustment (600dpi) (GAMMA 600) 30 AE limit adjustment (AE LIMIT) 31 Image sharpness adjustment (SHARPNESS) 32 Copier color reproduction setting (COLOR REAPPEAR) 39 FAX mode sharpness adjustment (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 48 01 Mains can/sub scan direction magnification ratio (COPY MAG.) 05 RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio in copying (RSPF MAG.) 49 01 Download mode (DOWNLOAD MODE)
Main Sub Contents code code 50 01 Lead edge image position (LEAD EDGE) 06 Copy lead edge position adjustment (RSPF) (RSPF EDGE) 10 Print center offset adjustment (PRT.OFF-CENTER) 12 Document feed off-center adjustment (ORG.OFF-CENTER) 18 Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy (DPLX REVERSE) 19 Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment (DPLX END EDGE) (AR-208D only) 51 02 Resist amount adjustment (RESIST ADJ.) 53 08 RSPF scan position automatic adjustment (SPF AUTO) 61 03 HSYNC output check (LSU CHK) 63 01 Shading check (SHADING CHK) 02 Black level automatic correction (BLACK LEVEL) 12 Light quantity stable wait time setting (LT.STABLE TIME) 13 Light quantity stable width setting (LT.STABLE RNG.) 64 01 Self print (1by2 mode) (SELF PRT.) 66 01 FAX soft SW setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 02 FAX soft SW initializing (excluding the adjustment values) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 03 FAX PWB memory check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 04 Signal send mode (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 05 Signal send mode (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 07 Image memory content print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 10 Image memory content clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 11 300bps signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 12 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 13 Dial test (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 17 DTMF signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 18 DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 21 FAX information print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 24 FAST SRAM clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 30 TEL/LIU status change check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 33 Signal detection check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 34 Communication time measurement (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 37 Speaker sound volume setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 38 Time setting/check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
4. Descriptions of various test commands

Main code 1 Sub code 01 Contents Mirror scan (SCAN CHK) Details of function/operation [Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the home position is checked and the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio. During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed. The mirror home position sensor status is displayed with the COPY mode lamp. (When the mirror is in the home position, the lamp lights up.) During operation, the copy lamp lights up. When [C] key is pressed, if the operation is on the way, it is terminated and the machine goes to the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 01-01 SCAN CHK - 100% + 2) [ZOOM] 01-01 SCAN CHK - 78% + 02 Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display (MHP-SENSOR) 2) [] 01-01 SCAN CHK - 99% + 2) [] 01-01 SCAN CHK - 101% + 3) [ENTER/START] 01-01 SCAN CHK EXECUTING... 78% +
[Function] Monitors the mirror home position sensor, and makes the "COPY mode lamp" turn on during the sensor ON status. [Operation] 1) Initial display 01-02 MHP-SENSOR EXECUTING...
06
Mirror scan aging (SCAN AGING)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio. During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed. After 3sec, the mirror base performs full scan again.
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed once, the ready lamp remains OFF.
The mirror home position sensor status is displayed on the "COPY mode lamp." (The lamp is ON when the mirror is in the home position.) During aging, the copy lamp is ON. [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 1-01. [Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the set magnification ratio is acquired and duplex document transport is performed in the case of RSPF. However, the operating conditions don't matter and the operation is not stopped even in case of a jam. Also the magnification ratio is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 1-01. [Function] The ON/OFF status of the RSPF sensors can be checked with the LCD. When a sensor is ON, the sensor name is displayed on the LCD. Sensor Document set sensor RSPF document transport sensor RSPF paper feed cover open/close sensor RSPF paper exit sensor [Operation] 1) Initial display 02-02 SPF SENSOR 03 RSPF motor operation check (SPF MOTOR CHK) 2) When the sensor is ON: 02-02 SPF SENSOR SPID SPPD SDSW SPOD Display item SPID SPPD SDSW SPOD
01
Reversing Single Pass Feeder (RSPF) aging (SPF AGING)
02
RSPF sensor status display (SPF SENSOR)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the motor rotates for 10sec at the speed corresponding to the set magnification ratio. [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 1-01.
Main code 2
Sub code 08
Contents RSPF paper feed solenoid operation check (SPF SPUS CHK)
Details of function/operation [Function] The RSPF paper feed solenoid (SPUS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the use of the solenoid drive control Bios. [Operation] 1) Initial display 02-08 SPF SPUS CHK EXECUTING...
09
RSPF reverse solenoid operation check (RSPF SPFS CHK)
[Function] The RSPF reverse solenoid (SPFS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the use of the solenoid drive control Bios. [Operation] 1) Initial display 02-09 RSPF SPFS CHK EXECUTING...
03
Shifter operation check (SHIFTER CHK)
[Function] The shifter is moved back and forth in four reciprocations. [Operation] 1) Initial display 03-03 SHIFTER CHK EXECUTING...
01
Operation panel display check (LCD/LED CHK)
[Function] <LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)> When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, all the LCD's on the operation panel are turned ON (all pixels ON). After 5sec of ON, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. When [MODE SWITCH] key is pressed under the all ON state, the mode is shifted to the individual ON mode, where the LED's are turned on one by one from the left upper end to the left lower side then from the right upper side to the right lower side. (All the pixels of LCD are lighted simultaneously.) After lighting all the LCD's sequentially, all the LCD's are lighted simultaneously. After 5sec from lighting all the LCD's simultaneously, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. (Cycle of individual ON mode: ON 300ms, OFF 20ms) When [C] key is pressed in the LED check mode, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. When [START] key is pressed, the machine goes into the key input check mode. <Key input check mode> When the machine goes into the key input check mode, the LCD displays 0. When any key is pressed after pressing a key on the operation panel, "+1" is added to the value. Once a key is pressed, it is not recounted. When [START] key is pressed, counting is made and the machine goes into the LED ON check mode (LED all ON status) after 3sec. When [C] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time, the key check mode is retained as well as when another key is pressed. When [CA] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time, the key check mode is retained as well as when another key is pressed. (Note in the key input check mode) Be sure to press [START] key at the last. (If it is pressed on the way, the machine goes into the LED ON check mode.) (LED all ON status) Multi key input is ignored. [Operation] <LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)> 1) Initial display 2) When [MODE SWITCH] key is pressed, the machine goes into the individual ON mode. <Key input check mode> 1) Initial display 05-01 LCD/LED CHK. 0 2) [ENTER/START] 05-01 LCD/LED CHK. **
Main code 5
Sub code 02
Contents Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check (HT LAMP CHK)
Details of function/operation [Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the fusing lamp repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 5 times. During this period, the cooling fan motor rotates. [Operation] 1) Initial display 05-02 HT LAMP CHK EXECUTING...
03
Copy lamp ON check (C-LAMP CHK)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the copy lamp turns ON for 5sec. [Operation] 1) Initial display 05-03 C-LAMP CHK EXECUTING...
01
Paper feed solenoid (CPFS1, CPFS2, MPFS) operation check (PSOL CHK)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the selected paper feed solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and OF for 500ms 20times. When [//10KEY] is pressed, the paper feed solenoid setting is switched. Code number 0 1 2 [Operation] 1) Initial display 06-01 PSOL CHK 0:CPFS1 2) [/10KEY] 06-01 PSOL CHK 1:CPFS2 2) [/10KEY] 06-01 PSOL CHK 2:MPFS 3) [ENTER/START] 06-01 PSOL CHK EXECUTING... 4) Returns to the initial display. Setting CPFS1 CPFS2 MPFS Remark Operation is possible only when No. 2 cassette is installed.
02
Resist roller solenoid (RRS) operation check (RES.R SOL CHK)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the resist solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times. [Operation] 1) Initial display 06-02 RES.R SOL CHK EXECUTING...
01
Check of warm-up display and aging with JAM (W-UP/ AGING)
[Function] Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies. When the test command is executed, warm-up is started and warm-up time is added for every second from 0 and displayed. When warm-up is completed, addition is stopped. When [CA] key is pressed, the ready lamp lights up. After that, enter the copy quantity with [10KEY] and press [ENTER/START] key to repeat copying of the set quantity (interval 0sec). To cancel the test command, turn off the power or execute a test command which causes hardware reset. [Operation] 1) Initial display 07-01 W-UP/AGING 0 2) After 10sec 07-01 W-UP/AGING 10
Main code 7
Sub code 06
Contents Interval aging (INTERVAL AGING)
Details of function/operation [Function] Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies. When the test command is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted. Enter the copy quantity with the [10KEY] and press [ENTER/START] key, and copying is executed to make the set quantity of copies, and the ready state is kept for 3sec, and copying is executed again to make the set quantity of copies. These operations are repeated. To cancel the test command, turn off the power or execute a test command which executes hardware reset. [Operation] 1) Initial display (Basic display of copy) READY TO COPY 100% A4 0
08
Shift to copy with warm-up display (W-UP C-MODE)
[Function] Enter the test command code, and warm-up is started and warm-up time is counted for every second from 0 and displayed. When [CA] key is pressed during counting up, "0" is displayed on the display and counting is stopped. However, warm-up is continued. After completion of warm-up, counting is terminated. (The aging function is removed from test command 7-01.) [Operation] 1) Initial display 07-08 W-UP C-MODE 0 2) After 10sec 07-08 W-UP C-MODE 10
01
Developing bias output (DVLP BIAS SET.)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the developing bias signal is turned ON for 30sec. When, however, an actual output value is measured, use test command 25-01. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 08-01 DVLP BIAS SET. EXECUTING...
02
Main charger output (Grid HIGH) (MHV(H) SET.)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid voltage HIGH move. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 08-02 MHV(H) SET. EXECUTING...
03
Main charger output (Grid LOW) (MHV(L) SET.)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid voltage LOW move. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 08-03 MHV(L) SET. EXECUTING...
06
Transfer charger output (THV SET.)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the transfer charger is outputted for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 08-03 THV SET. EXECUTING...
Main code 9
Sub code 01
Contents Duplex motor normal rotation check (DPLX ROT.) (AR-208D only)
Details of function/operation [Function] Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the normal direction (paper exit direction) for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 09-01 DPLX ROT. EXECUTING...
02
Duplex motor reverse rotation check (DPLX ROT.REV.) (AR-208D only)
[Function] Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the reverse direction for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 09-02 DPLX ROT.REV. EXECUTING...
04
Duplex motor rotating speed adjustment (DPLX ROT. SPEED) (AR-208D only)
[Function] When this Test Command is executed, the currently set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [ENTER/START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. The greater the set value is, the higher the speed is. The smaller the set value is, the lower the speed is. (Setting range: 1 - 13, Default: 8) [Operation] 1) Initial display 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 8( 1-13) 2) [10KEY] 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 7( 1-13) 3) [ENTER/START] 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 7( 1-13)
10
Toner motor operation (TONER MOTOR)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the toner motor is rotated for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the main code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 10-00 TONER MOTOR EXECUTING...
14
Cancel of trouble other than U2 (TRBL CANC.)
[Function] Used to cancel troubles other than U2.

Cancel troubles such as H trouble which writes data into EEPROM, and perform hardware
reset. [Operation] 1) Initial display 14-00 TRBL CANC. CLEARED 16 U2 trouble cancel (U2 TRBL CANC.) [Function] Used to cancel U2 trouble. When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, check sum of the total counter in the EEPROM is rewritten and hardware reset is made. [Operation] 1) Initial display 16-00 U2 TRBL CANC. CLEARED 20 01 Maintenance counter clear (M-CNT CLR.) [Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the maintenance count value is cleared and "000,000" is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 20-01 M-CNT CLR. CLEARED 000,000
Main code 21
Sub code 01
Contents Maintenance cycle setting (M-CYCLE)
Details of function/operation [Function] The code of the currently set maintenance cycle value is displayed (initial display) and the set data are saved. Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 [Operation] 1) The current set value is displayed. 21-01 M-CYCLE 4:25,000 ( 0-5 ) 2) [/10KEY] 21-01 M-CYCLE 5:FREE ( 0-5 ) 2) [/10KEY] 21-01 M-CYCLE 3:13,000 ( 0-5 ) 3) [ENTER/START] 21-01 M-CYCLE 5:FREE ( 0-5 ) Setting 3,000 sheets 6,000 sheets 9,000 sheets 13,000 sheets 25,000 sheets Free (999,999 sheets) Remark
Default
22
01
Maintenance counter display (M-CNT)
[Function] The maintenance counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-01 M-CNT ***,***
02
Maintenance preset display (M-CNT PRESET)
[Function] The quantity (25,000 sheets, etc.) corresponding to the code set with TC21-01 is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-02 M-CNT PRESET ***,***
04
JAM total counter display (JAM TTL CNT)
[Function] The JAM total counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-04 JAM TTL CNT ***,***
05
Total counter display (TTL CNT)
[Function] The total counter value is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-05 TTL CNT ***,***
06
Developer counter display (DVLP CNT)
[Function] The developer counter data is acquired and displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-06 DVLP CNT ***,***
08
RSPF counter display (SPF CNT)
[Function] The RSPF counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-08 SPF CNT ***,***
Main code 22
Sub code 11
Contents FAX-related counter display (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] The FAX-related counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT COUNTER 1:PAGE 2:TIME
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
2) Select 1 SEND PAGE:xxx,xxx RECV PAGE:xxx,xxx ("xxx,xxx" is the current value.)

[CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
2) Select 2 TX TIME:xxxx:xx.xx RX TIME:xxxx:xx.xx ("xxxx: xxx. xx" is the current value.)

12
Drum counter display (DRUM CNT)
[Function] The drum counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-12 DRUM CNT ***,***
13
CRUM type display (CRUM TYPE)
[Function] When the test command is executed, the CRUM type currently set (written) in the CRUM chip is displayed. Code number 00 01 02 03 99 [Operation] 1) The CRUM type is displayed. 22-13 CRUM TYPE 01:BTA-A CRUM type Not set BTA-A BTA-B BTA-C Conversion Display item 0 BTA-A BTA-B BTA-C CONVERSION
14
ROM version display (ROM VER.)
[Function] The P-ROM version is displayed. Press [//10KEY] to switch the display version. Code number 0 1 2 [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-14 ROM VER. MAIN PROG. 00.00 2) [/10KEY] 22-14 ROM VER. F-IMC PROG. 00.00 2) [/10KEY] 22-14 ROM VER. LCD DATA 00.00 Version Main unit Program F-IMC Program LCD DATA Display item MAIN PROG. F-IMC PROG. LCD DATA
16
Duplex counter display (DPLX CNT) (AR-208D only)
[Function] The duplex counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-16 DPLX CNT ***,***
Main code 22
Sub code 17
Contents Copy counter display (COPIES CNT) [Function] The copy counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-17 COPIES CNT ***,***
Details of function/operation
18
Printer counter display (PRT.CNT)
[Function] The printer counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-18 PRT.CNT ***,***
19
Scanner mode counter display (S-MODE CNT)
[Function] The scanner mode counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-19 S-MODE CNT ***,***
21
Scanner counter display (SCAN CNT)
[Function] The scanner counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-21 SCAN CNT ***,***
22
RSPF JAM counter display (S JAM CNT)
[Function] The RSPF JAM counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-22 S JAM CNT ***,***
24
01
JAM total counter clear (JAM TTL CLR.)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the JAM total counter is cleared to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-01 JAM TTL CLR. CLEARED 000,000
04
RSPF counter clear (SPF CLR.)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the RSPF counter value is cleared to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-04 SPF CLR. CLEARED 000,000
05
Duplex counter clear (DPLX CLR.) (AR-208D only)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the duplex counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-05 DPLX CLR. CLEARED 000,000
Main code 24
Sub code 06
Contents Developer counter clear (DVLP CLR.)
Details of function/operation [Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the developer counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-06 DVLP CLR. CLEARED 000,000
07
Drum counter clear (DRUM CLR.)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the drum counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-07 DRUM CLR. CLEARED 000,000
08
Copy counter clear (COPIES CLR.)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the copy counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-08 COPIES CLR. CLEARED 000,000
09
Printer counter clear (PRT.CLR.)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the printer counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-09 PRT.CLR. CLEARED 000,000
10
FAX counter clear (FAX CLR.) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the FAX count value is set to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-10 FAX CLR. CLEARED 000,000
13
Scanner counter clear (SCAN CLR.)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the scanner counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-13 SCAN CLR. CLEARED 000,000
14
RSPF JAM total counter clear (S JAM TTL CLR.)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the RSPF JAM total counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-14 S JAM TTL CLR. CLEARED 000,000
15
Scanner mode counter clear (S-MODE CLR.)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the scanner mode counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-15 S-MODE CLR. CLEARED 000,000
Main code 25
Sub code 01
Contents Main motor operation check (MAIN MOTOR CHK)
Details of function/operation [Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the main motor (and the duplex motor in the case of a duplex model) is operated for 30sec. To reduce toner consumption, if the developing unit is installed, the developing bias, the main charger, and the grid are also outputted. In this case, laser discharge is required when stopping the motor, the polygon motor is also operated at the same time. Check for installation of the developing unit. If it is not installed, the high voltage above is not outputted and only the motor is rotated. To check the developing bias, install the developing unit. After completion of 30sec operation, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 25-01 MAIN MOTOR CHK EXECUTING...
10
Polygon motor operation check (LSU CHK)
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the Bios is called to rotate the polygon motor for 30sec. After completion of 30sec operation, the operation is turned off with the Bios and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 25-10 LSU CHK EXECUTING...
26
02
(R)SPF setting (SPF/RSPF)
[Function] When this test command is executed, the current set (R)SPF is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired (R)SPF and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting. Code number SPF 0 SPF NO 1 SPF YES* 2 RSPF YES * Cannot be executed. Display item SPF OFF SPF ON RSPF ON
03
Second cassette setting (2ND TRAY)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set second cassette is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired second cassette and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 Second cassette Second cassette NO Second cassette YES Display item OFF ON
04
Main unit duplex setting (DPLX)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set duplex is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired duplex and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 Duplex Duplex NO Duplex YES* Display item OFF ON
* AR-208S: cannot be executed. [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
Main code 26
Sub code 06
Contents Destination setting (DESTINATION)
Details of function/operation [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set destination is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired destination and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 2 3 Destination Inch series EX Japan AB series Japan AB series China (EX Japan AB series + China paper support) Display item INCH AB CHINA
Code numbers 2 and 3 cannot be selected for the AR-208S and the AR-208D.
07
Machine conditions check (CPM)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When this test command is executed, the current machine setting is displayed. CPM 20 CPM [Operation] 1) The machine setting is displayed. 26-07 CPM 20 CPM Copy quantity 20 Remark
20
Rear edge void setting (END EDGE)
[Function] When this test command is executed, the current set rear edge void is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired rear edge void and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 Setting Rear edge void NO Rear edge void YES Display item OFF ON Remark Default
30
CE mark support control ON/OFF (CE MARK)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set CE mark support control is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired CE mark support control and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 Setting CE mark support control OFF CE mark support control ON Display item OFF ON Remark Default (100V series)
37
Cancel of stop at developer life over (DVLP LIFE END)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When this test command is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired setting and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 Setting Stop at developer life over Cancel of stop at developer life over Display item STOP NONSTOP Remark
39
Memory capacity check (MEM.CHK)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When the test command is executed, the currently installed SDRAM of the main unit is displayed. Code number 8 16 [Operation] 1) Memory capacity display 26-39 MEM.CHK 8 MBYTE Setting 8 MBYTE 16 MBYTE Remark
Main code 26
Sub code 40
Contents Polygon motor OFF time setting (Time required from completion of printing to turning OFF the motor) (LSU MOTOR OFF)
Details of function/operation [Function] When this test command is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired setting and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 2 3 Setting 0sec 30sec 60sec 90sec Display item 0 SEC. 30 SEC. 60 SEC. 90 SEC. Remark Default
42
Transfer ON timing control setting (TC ON TIMING)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When this test command is executed, the currently set value of the transfer ON timing is displayed (initial display), and the set value is saved. Mode Front surface paper lead edge Front surface paper rear edge Back surface paper lead edge Back surface paper rear edge Display item F-REAR F-END B-REAR B-END Default 11 50 11 50 Setting range 0 21 1 99 0 21 1 99
<Front/back surface of paper lead edge adjustment table> Code 0 1 10 11 12 21 Setting 0 msec 20 msec 2 msec 0 msec +2 msec +20 msec Remark
<Front/back surface of paper rear edge adjustment table> Code 1 49 50 51 99 Setting 98 msec 2 msec 0 msec +2 msec +98 msec Remark
Default
Default
The default "50" of the transfer OFF timing
The default value, "11," of the transfer ON
timing indicates "236msec passed from PS release." When set to "0," it is same as setting to the default, "11." The transfer ON timing can be adjusted to 236msc 2ms. [Operation] 1) Initial display <Front surface lead edge setting> 26-42 TC ON TIMING F-REAR 11( 0-21 ) 2) [/] Mode selection 26-42 TC ON TIMING F-END 50( 1-99 )
indicates "210msec passed from PPD1 OFF." The transfer OFF timing can be adjusted to 210msec 2ms.
3) [10KEY] Value entry 26-42 TC ON TIMING F-END 51( 1-99 ) 4) [ENTER/START] Settles the entered value. The display is shifted to the sub code input standby menu.
Main code 26
Sub code 43
Contents Side void amount setting (SIDE VOID)
Details of function/operation [Function] When this test command is executed, the currently set code of the side void quantity is displayed (initial display), and the set data are saved. (Setting range: 0 10, Default: 4 (= One side 2.0mm)) Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Setting 0 mm 0.5 mm 1.0 mm 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 2.5 mm 3.0 mm 3.5 mm 4.0 mm 4.5 mm 5.5 mm Remark
Default
When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the side void is changed as follows:
Side void adjustment: The side void is increased by 0.5mm. (The side void of Set value x 0.5mm is made.) [Operation] 1) Initial display 26-43 SIDE VOID 4( 0-10) 54 life correction setting (GAMMA CTRL) [Function] Used to set the life correction. When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting. (Setting range: 0 1, default: 1) Code number 0 1 Setting OFF ON Display item OFF ON Remark Default 2) [10KEY] 26-43 SIDE VOID 5( 0-10) 3) [ENTER/START] 26-43 SIDE VOID 5( 0-10)
62
Energy-save mode copy lamp setting (C-LAMP E-S)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] Used to set half-ON /OFF of the copy lamp in the pre-heat mode. When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 Setting Copy lamp OFF Copy lamp half-ON Display item OFF ON Remark Default
30
01
Paper sensor status display (P-SENSOR)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] The paper sensor status is displayed on the LCD. Sensor Paper exit sensor No. 1 tray paper width sensor No. 2 tray paper width sensor Paper entry sensor Duplex sensor No. 2 tray paper feed sensor Display item POD PD1 PD2 PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 Remark
Since the manual paper feed sensor is a single bypass sensor, its status is not displayed. The width sensor is available only in the FAX models.
[Operation] 1) Initial display 30-01 P-SENSOR 2) When sensor ON 30-01 POD PD1 PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 PD2
Main code 41
Sub code 06
Contents OC cover float detection level adjustment (OC FLOAT LEVEL)
Details of function/operation [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed. When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the SPF scan position to acquire the OC cover float detection level. When the mirror base unit returns to the home position, the acquired value is displayed. If the detection level is not acquired, ERR display is made. (Default: 0) Note that, this test command must be executed with the OC cover closed.
If the value is 0, float detection is not performed in normal jobs.
[Operation] 1) Initial display 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL 0 2) [ENTER/START] 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL EXECUTING... <Canceling - when C/CA key is pressed-> After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. THE JOB IS BEING CANCELED. 3) When the level is acquired: 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL **** OK 3) When the level is not acquired: 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL **** ERR 07 OC cover float detection margin setting (OC FLOAT MGN) [Function] For the number of pixels between black markers on the SPF scanning position saved in 41-06: (OC cover float detection level adjustment), if the number of pixels between the markers when processing float detection is less than the number of pixels set with this simulation, it is judged as the float error. When the set value of this test command is "0," no float error occurs. When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [START] key. The setting is saved and the display is shifted to the sub code input standby menu. Setting range: 0 99 (Copes with margin 0 99 pixels.) Default: 30 (30 pixels) [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 9-04. [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Press [// 10KEY] key to change the setting and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting into the EERPOM. The machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Set temperature (C) 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 Remark
43
01
Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy) (FU TEMP)
Default
Mode Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed Manual paper feed
Display item TRAY1 MFT
The cassette feed and the manual feed are controlled similarly.
[Operation] 1) Initial display <Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed setting> 43-01 FU TEMP TRAY1 6( 0-8 ) 2) [/] Mode selection 43-01 FU TEMP MFT 6( 0-8 ) 3) [10KEY] Value entry 43-01 FU TEMP MFT 7( 0-8 ) 4) [ENTER/START] Settles the entered value. The display is shifted to the sub code input standby menu.
Main code 43
Sub code 04
Contents Fusing temperature setting in multi copy (FU TEMP MULTI)
Details of function/operation [Function] For 20th sheet or later in multi copy, the fusing temperature is automatically changed from the temperature set with test command 43-1 to the temperature set with this test command. When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the code number and press [ENTER/START] key to change the setting. Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Set temperature (C) 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 Remark
Mode Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed Manual paper feed Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed (small-size) Manual paper feed (small-size)
The cassette feed and the manual feed are controlled similarly.
Display item TRAY1 MFT TRAY1 SH MFT SH
Default 3 3 3 3
05
Fusing temperature setting in duplex copy (FU TEMP DPLX) (AR-208D only)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 43-01. [Function] In the case of duplex copy, the shift temperature set with this test command is applied to the fusing temperature. When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting. Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Shift temperature (C) 0 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 +2 +4 +6 +8 Remark Default
14
Fusing start temperature setting (FU TEMP START)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When this test command is started, the currently set code number is displayed. Press [//10KEY] to switch the setting, and press [ENTER/START] key to save it to the EEPROM. The machine goes to the sub code entry standby mode. Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Set temperature (C) 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 Remark
Default
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 43-01.
Main code 46
Sub code 01
Contents Copy density adjustment (300dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 300)
Details of function/operation [Function] Copy density is set for each mode. When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, the copy becomes lighter. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lighter, too. Press [/] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD. (Adjustment value: 1 99) The setting procedure of the magnification ratio is the same as that to copy operation. Mode AE mode (300dpi) TEXT mode (300dpi) PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT)(300dpi) TS mode (AE)(300dpi) Display item AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT TSAE Default 50 50 50 50 50 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp [Operation] 1) Initial display 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 50( 1-99) 2) [] Mode selection 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 TSAE 100% 50( 1-99) 2) [] Mode selection 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 TEXT 100% 50( 1-99) 3) [10KEY] Value entry 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 62( 1-99) 4) [START] Fixing and printing value (No change on the LCD)
Print is started in the set mode.
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 62( 1-99) 4) To fix the set value without printing, press [Enter] key. 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 62( 1-99)
To cancel manual feed paper empty MSG,
press any key.

When performing the AE mode exposure
adjustment, place the test chart on the document table so that the center area of 10cm is not covered.
02
Copy density adjustment (600dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 600)
[Function] Copy density is set for each mode. When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, the copy becomes lighter. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lighter, too. Press [/] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD. (Adjustment value: 1 99) Mode AE mode (600dpi) TEXT mode (600dpi) PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT) (600dpi) TS mode (AE) (600dpi) Display item AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT TSAE Default 50 50 50 50 50 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
Main code 46
Sub code 12
Contents Density adjustment in the FAX mode (Collective adjustment) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is executed with the entered exposure adjustment value and the data stored on the FAX side is rewritten into the entered value. All data of the exposure adjustment values are rewritten into the same value. For the density adjustment table data, refer to TC46-13 (density adjustment (normal text) in the FAX mode). [Operation] 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. AUTO XX 3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED of [START] key is turned off. ADJUST SCAN EXP. AUTO YY
("XX" is the exposure adjustment value of normal text stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value. ADJUST EXP. AUTO YY
4) Print is started (self print). ADJUST PRINT EXP. AUTO YY
After completion of printing, returns to 2) display.
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) 13 FAX mode density adjustment (normal text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Scan is started with the exposure adjustment value entered with [START] key, and the stored data of the selected mode on the FAX side is rewritten into the input value. Density adjustment value data table Mode STD (Normal text) Fine (Fine text) Sfine (Super fine) Photo off on off on off Exposure adjustment value
When initializing each data: 50 [Operation] 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. STD XX 3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED of [START] key is turned off. ADJUST SCAN EXP. STD YY
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of normal text mode stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value with [10KEY]. ADJUST EXP. STD YY
4) Print is started (self print). ADJUST PRINT EXP. STD YY
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) 14 FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value. For the density adjustment value table data, refer to TC46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment (normal text).) [Operation] 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. FINE XX 3) Scan start (self print) ADJUST SCAN EXP. FINE YY
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of the fine text mode stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value with [10KEY]. ADJUST EXP. FINE YY
4) Print start (self print) ADJUST PRINT EXP. AUTO YY
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 19
Main code 46
Sub code 15
Contents FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value. For the density adjustment value table data, refer to TC46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment (normal text).) [Operation] 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. S-FINE XX 3) Scan start (self print) ADJUST SCAN EXP. S-FINE YY
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of the super fine mode stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value with [10KEY]. ADJUST EXP. S-FINE YY
4) Print start (self print) ADJUST PRINT EXP. S-FINE YY
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) 18 Image contrast adjustment (300dpi) (GAMMA 300) [Function] Contrast is set for each mode. When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is decreased, the contrast becomes lower. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too. Press [/] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD. (Adjustment value: 1 99) Mode AE mode (300dpi) TEXT mode (300dpi) PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT) (300dpi) TS mode (AE) (300dpi)
No density display on LCD.
Display item AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT TSAE
Default 50 50 50 50 50
LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp
Main code 46
Sub code 19
Contents Exposure mode setting (AE MODE) [Function] < table setting>
When this test command is executed, the code number of the current set gamma table is displayed. (Default: 2) Enter the code number corresponding to the desired gamma table, and press [/] key to change the mode and write into the EEPROM. <AE operation mode> When setting the table, press [] key to change to the AE operation mode, and the current set code number of the AE operation mode is displayed. (Default: 0) Enter the code number corresponding to the desired AE operation mode and press [/] key to change the mode and write into the EEPROM. <PHOTO image process setting> When [] key is pressed in AE operation mode setting, the mode is changed to the PHOTO image process setting and the code number of the current set PHOTO image process setting is displayed. (Default: 1) Enter the code number corresponding to the desired PHOTO image process setting and press [/] key to change the mode and write into the EEPROM. Mode
Display item GAMMA AE PHOTO
AE PHOTO [Operation]
Code number 1 2 0 1 1 2
Setting content Image quality priority mode Toner consumption priority mode Lead edge stop Real time process Error diffusion process Dither process
Remark Default Default Default
1) Initial display < table setting> 46-19 AE MODE GAMMA 2( 1-2)
2) [] Mode selection 46-19 AE MODE AE 0( 0-1) 2) [] Mode selection 46-19 AE MODE PHOTO 1( 1-2)
3) [10KEY] Value input 46-19 AE MODE AE 1( 0-1) 4) [ENTER/START] Save the set value. The machine goes to the sub code entry standby mode.
20
RSPF exposure correction (EXP.LEVEL SPF)
[Function] Used to adjust the exposure correction amount in the RSPF mode. The adjustment is made by adjusting Vref voltage variation for the OC mode. When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy. When the set value is increased, copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, copy becomes lighter. (Adjustment range: 1 99) Mode RSPF Display item SPF Default 50 Remark
Main code 46
Sub code 29
Contents Image contrast adjustment (600dpi) (GAMMA 600) [Function] Contrast is set for each mode.
When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is decreased, the contrast becomes lower. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too. Press [/] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD. (Adjustment value: 1 99) Mode AE mode (600dpi) TEXT mode (600dpi) PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT)(600dpi) TS mode (AE)(600dpi)
No density display on LCD.
Display item AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT TSAE
Default 50 50 50 50 50
LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp
30
AE limit adjustment (AE LIMIT)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. [Function] Used to set the limit value in AE and AE (toner save). Change the setting and press [ENTER/START] key to write the setting into the EEPROM. The machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. By pressing [/] key, setting is changed. (Setting range: 0 31, Default: 0) Mode Limit value for AE Limit value for AE (toner save) <Remark> When test command 26-06 (Destination setting) or test command 46-19 Auto Exposure mode is changed, the setting of this test command is also changed to the default in connection. [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-19. [Function] Used to adjust sharpening/blurring of image in each mode. Image quality Blurring Standard Sharpening Setting No 0 1 2 Remark Default Display item AE TEXT Remark
31
Image sharpness adjustment (SHARPNESS)
When this test command is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set value is displayed. (Default: 1) Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions. To change the mode, press [/] key. The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on the LCD. Mode AE mode TEXT mode PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT) TS mode (AE) Display item AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT TSAE Default setting 1 1 1 1 1 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
Main code 46
Sub code 32
Contents Copier color reproduction setting (COLOR REAPPEAR)
Details of function/operation [Function] Used to set color reproduction in each mode. Colors easy to be copied and colors difficult to be copied can be switched. Set value 0 1 2 Colors easy to be copied Purple, Blue, Red Water blue, Green, Blue Yellow, Red, Green Colors difficult to be copied Yellow, Green, Water blue Purple, Red, Yellow Blue, Water blue, Purple
This setting has virtually no effect on black-and-white documents.
When this test command is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set value is displayed. (Default: 0) Press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions . At that time, color components are changed for used in copying. To change the mode, press [/] key. The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on the LCD. Specification component Green Red Blue Mode AE mode (including TS) TEXT mode (including TS) PHOTO mode Setting No 0 1 2 Display item AE TEXT PHOTO Remark Default
Default setting 0 0 0
LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp
39
FAX mode sharpness adjustment (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered sharpness adjustment value, and the data of the selected mode stored on the FAX side is changed to the entered value. Sharpness adjustment value data table 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Mode STD FINE S-FINE FINE/PHOTO S-FINE/PHOTO Sharpness adjustment value
When initializing each data: 1 [Operation] 1) Initial display SHARPNESS SETTING PRESS , 2) [/] or after 2sec Every time when [] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 2 3 4 5 1. When [] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SHARPNESS SET (1-5) 1:STD 3) Select the arrow key 1-5, and the LED of [START] key is lighted. SHARPNESS SETTING ZZZZ(0-2) X ("ZZZZ" is the mode selected among STD, FINE, S-FINE, FINE/PHOTO, and S-FINE/ PHOTO.) ("X" is the corresponding sharpness adjustment value of the selected mode stored on the FAX side.)
[CLEAR] key: Returns to 2) display.
4) Enter a one-digit value (0-2) as the sharpness adjustment value with [10KEY]. SHARPNESS SETTING ZZZZ(0-2) Y ("Y" is the entered sharpness adjustment value.)
[CLEAR] key: Returns to 2) display.
5) Scan start (self print) SHARPNESS SETTING SCAN Y 6) Print start (self print) SHARPNESS SETTING PRINT Y After completion of printing, returns to 4) display.
Main code 48
Sub code 01
Contents Main scan/sub scan direction magnification ratio (COPY MAG.)
Details of function/operation [Function] Used to adjust the magnification ratio in the main scan (front/rear) direction and sub scan direction. Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY]. Press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.) The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [/] key. (Adjustment range: 1 99, Default: 50) Mode Main scan direction magnification ratio OC mode sub scan direction magnification ratio Display item F-R SCAN Default value 50 50 LED PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp
05
RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio in copying (RSPF MAG.)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. [Function] Used to display the current RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio on the LCD. When [START] key is pressed, the entered data is acquired and saved into the EEPROM, and a copy is made. (When the set value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.) The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [/] key. (Adjustment range: 1 99, Default: 50) When adjusting the RSPF, the mode is set to "Duplex Single," single copies of two sheets are performed. For printing, regardless of the density mode and the density level, Density mode = MANUAL Density level = 3 Mode Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the front surface of RSPF document Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the back surface of RSPF document Initial value of duplex setting S-S D-S Display item SIDE1 SIDE2 Default 50 50 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp
When there is no document in RSPF, copy is inhibited.
Main code 49
Sub code 01
Contents Download mode (DOWNLOAD MODE)
Details of function/operation [Function] When this test command is executed, "DLOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD and the machine goes into the program writing mode from PC to Flash ROM. Use the writing tool on the PC and write the program. During writing, the display shows as follows: After completion of download, turn OFF/ON the power to reset. Status Download data receiving Loader function transfer Date delete start Data write (Boot section) Data write (Program section) Data write (EEPROM) Data write (LCD) During SUM CHECK During BOOT SUM CHECK During EEPROM SUM CHECK Download complete Display item RECEIVING LOADER COPYING FLASH ERASE BOOT WRITING PROGRAM WRITING E2PROM WRITING LCD DATE WRITING FLASH ROM SUM CHECK BOOT SUM CHECK EEPROM SUM CHECK DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!
In case of an error in download, the following message is displayed on the LCD. Error status PC data receiving Loader function transfer FLASH ROM delete Boot section FLASH ROM write Program section FLASH ROM write Loader section SUM CHECK Boot section SUM CHECK Program section SUM CHECK E2PROM SUM CHECK E2PROM write E2PROM read Verify E2PROM collating Verify Boot section lens check Program section lens check E2PROM lens check Total data size check IMC communication error IMC FRASH ROM write LCD section lens check LCD section FLASH ROM write LCD section SUM CHECK Display item E-01 PC TRANS E-02 LOADER COPY E-03 FLASH ERASE E-04 BOOT WRITE E-05 PROGRAM WRITE E-06 LOADER SUM E-07 BOOT SUM E-08 PROGRAM SUM E-09 E2PROM SUM E-10 E2PROM WRITE E-11 E2PROM READ E-12 E2PROM COLLATE E-13 BOOT LENGTH E-14 PROGRAM LENGTH E-15 E2PROM LENGTH E-16 DATE SIZE E-17 IMC TRANS E-18 IMC FLASH WRITE E-19 LCD DATE LENGTH E-20 LCD DATE WRITE E-21 LCD DATE SUM
To enter the download mode, there is a method to use key operations as well as to use a test command. With the power OFF, press and hold [CA] + [], turn on the power. [Operation] 1) Initial display DOWNLOAD MODE
Main code 50
Sub code 01
Contents Lead edge image position (LEAD EDGE)
Details of function/operation [Function] Used to adjust the copy image position and the lead edge void amount on copy paper. The adjustment is made by adjusting the image scan start position at 100% and the print start position (resist roller ON timing). When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center value: 50) When [/] key is pressed, the setting mode and the display are changed. Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. When the adjustment is made by the main cassette paper feed, the adjustment values of all the paper feed ports become the same. (When the set value is increased by 1, shift is made by 0.1mm.) Mode Print start position (Main cassette paper feed) (*) Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed) Print start position (Manual paper feed) Image lead edge void amount Image scan start position Image rear edge void amount (Cassette paper feed) Display item TRAY1 TRAY2 MFT DEN-A RRC-A DEN-B Default 50 50 50 50 50 50 LED COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp COPY mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp PRINT mode lamp Main cassette lamp SCAN mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp
Image rear edge void amount (Manual paper feed)
RRC-B
50
(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
When printing with the manual paper feed tray, use paper of the letter size. When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.
[Adjustment procedure] 1) Set the print start position (A: AE mode lamp/COPY mode lamp ON), the lead edge void amount (B: TEXT mode lamp/PRINT mode lamp ON), the scan start position (C: PHOTO mode lamp/SCAN mode lamp) to zero, and make a copy of the scale at 100%. 2) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale. Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.) When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50) 3) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position. Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.) When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is moved to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50). 4) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50) When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is extended by about 0.1mm. (For 25 or less, however, the void amount is regarded as 0.)
The RSFP adjustment is made by adjusting the RSPF image scan start position after OC
adjustment. (Example)
Distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge, H = 5mm Image loss, R = 4mm
5mm
10mm
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 26
Main code 50
Sub code 06
Contents Copy lead edge position adjustment (RSPF) (RSPF EDGE)
Details of function/operation [Function] Used to adjust the RSPF copy lead edge. When the adjustment value of the document scan position adjustment is increased by 1, the scan start timing is advanced by 0.1mm. The print result is shifted to the opposite direction of the scan start position. The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [/] key. (Adjustment range: 1 99, Default: 50) When scanning a back surface of document, the mode must be changed to operate the RSPF by pressing [2-SIDED COPY] key. Mode Front surface document scan position adjustment Back surface document scan position adjustment Rear edge void adjustment (RSPF) Initial value of duplex setting S-S D-S S-S Display item SIDE1 SIDE2 END Default 50 50 50 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp
When there is no document in the RSPF, copy is inhibited. When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.
10
Print center offset adjustment (PRT.OFFCENTER)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. [Function] Used to adjust the center offset position of copy images on copy paper and that in scanning document. When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy. (When the set value is changed by 1, the center is shifted by 0.1mm.) When the adjustment value is increased, the center is shifted to right. When decreased, the center is shifted to left. The modes can be selected by pressing [/] key. When the set value is changed largely, the area outside the shading area may be scanned to cause black streaks on the edges. When the RSPF is used, select the mode for use of the RSPF by [2-SIDED COPY] key. Mode Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) (*) Print center offset (2nd cassette paper feed) Print center offset (Manual paper feed) (**) 2nd print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) Display item TRAY1 TRAY2 MFT SIDE2 Default 50 50 50 50 LED COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp COPY mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp PRINT mode lamp Main cassette lamp
(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip. (**) : For Simplex models, skip.
When printing with the manual paper feed tray, use paper of the letter size. In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as 1to2/Short Edge from OC
regardless of duplex setting.

When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.
12
Document feed off-center adjustment (ORG.OFFCENTER)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. [Function] Used to adjust document scan off-center adjustment. The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [/] key. (Adjustment range: 1 99, Default: 50) When the adjustment value is increased, the print result is shifted to left. Mode Platen document scan SPF document front scan RSPF document back scan Initial value of duplex setting S-S S-S D-S Display item OC SPF RSPF Default 50 50 50 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 27
Main code 50
Sub code 18
Contents Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy (DPLX REVERSE)
Details of function/operation [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set correction value is displayed. Enter the correction value and press [START] key to save the entered correction value. (Correction value range; 1 99, Default: 50) For S-D mode front surface print and print of even paged in D-S mode, reverse memory copy operation is performed from the rear edge of documents. When, therefore, the print position adjustment of output images is required, adjust as follows: In the reverse memory coping, when the document scan is made in the arrow direction, the output image is printed from the rear edge of scan image, When, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart so that the reference position is on the rear edge, and use this test command to adjust the set value so that the print lead edge is matched. Since printing is made from the image data most lately stored in memory to the lead edge data from the print start position, the image lead edge adjustment is made by changing the end data position stored in memory by the set value of this test command. Since it is performed by changing the scan end position, the image position adjustment is made by changing the scan end position and the end data stored in memory. The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [/] key. Mode OC memory reverse output position (AR-208D only) RSPF memory reverse output position Initial value of duplex setting S-D D-S Display item OC SPF Default 50 50 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp
Document transport direction Scan lead edge
Document transport direction Print lead edge Lead edge void (1) Print start position
Scan end position (Default: Scan cut by void (1)) Scan direction Scan rear edge
Rear edge void Print rear edge
The initial value of duplex setting is "1to2/Long Edge" for the duplex model, or "2to1" for the
simplex model.
19
Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment (DPLX END EDGE) (AR-208D only)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. [Function] Used to adjust the rear edge void amount in duplex copy. When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center value: 50.) The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [/] key. (Adjustment range; 1 99) Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (The paper information is cleared for every copy.) When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased by about 0.1mm. Mode Paper rear edge void amount Print start position (Duplex back surface) RSPF setting.
Display item DEN-B RRC-D
Default 50 50
LED PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp
The initial value for duplex setting is "1to2/Short Edge" for the OC setting, or "2to2" for the
Main code 51
Sub code 02
Contents Resist amount adjustment (RESIST ADJ.)
Details of function/operation [Function] Used to adjust the contact pressure of the main unit resist roller and the RSPF resist roller onto paper. When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed. The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [/] key. Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. Mode Main cassette paper fed (*) 2nd cassette paper feed Manual paper feed RSPF document paper feed (Front surface) Display item TRAY1 TRAY2 MFT SIDE1 Default 50 50 50 50 LED COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp COPY mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp RSPF document paper feed (Back surface) (*) Duplex back surface SIDE2 50 Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp DUP-2 50 Main cassette lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Main cassette lamp (*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip. [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. [Function] Place a A4 paper (white chart) so that it covers the RSPF scan glass and the OC glass together, and close the RSPF. When this test command is executed, the current adjustment value is displayed as the initial display.
Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 99. Adjustment unit 1 = about 0.127mm If the values are kept as the default values, RSPF scan is not performed properly. The front
53
08
RSPF scan position automatic adjustment (SPF AUTO)
area of the proper scan position may be scanned. In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from the home position to the RSPF scan position with the adjustment value displayed. The RSPF glass cover edge position is calculated from the difference between the RSPF glass cover edge and the OC side document glass CCD output level. If the adjustment is normal, the adjusted value is displayed. If abnormal, the error LED lights up with the current set value displayed. During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again, execution is performed again. Mode RSPF scan position auto adjustment RSPF scan position manual adjustment Display item AUTO MANU Default 1 1 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. (In MANUAL) OK/ERR display in AUTO <When OK> 53-08 SPF AUTO AUTO 100% ** 61 03 HSYNC output check (LSU CHK) OK <When ERR> 53-08 SPF AUTO AUTO 100% ** ERR
[Function] When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, HSYNC is performed and the polygon motor is rotated for 30sec. At that time, the COPY mode lamp is lighted for 100msec every time when HSYNC is detected. [Operation] 1) Initial display 61-03 LSU CHK EXECUTING...
Main code 63
Sub code 01
Contents Shading check (SHADING CHK)
Details of function/operation [Function] Used to display the detection level of white plate for shading. When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading and the copy lamp is lighted. When the light quantity is stabilized, revision is made for every second, and the level of one pixel at the center of CCD which is not corrected is detected and the value is displayed in decimal values on the LCD. (3 digits) [Operation] 1) Initial display 63-01 SHADING CHK EXECUTING... 000
02
Black level automatic correction (BLACK LEVEL)
[Function] Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level adjustment of white balance. When this test command is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit hexadecimal number. Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the correction document so that the density 10 (black side) comes on the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the plate left center.
10 Chart back surface
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart and calculates the correction value. After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the LCD.
Default: 0 If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60.
[Operation] 1) Initial display 63-02 BLACK LEVEL 000 2) [ENTER/START] Correction start 63-02 BLACK LEVEL EXECUTING... <During canceling - When C/CA is pressed-> After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. THE JOB IS BEING CANCELED. 3) After execution 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** OK 3) In case of an error 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** ERR 12 Light quantity stable wait time setting (LT.STABLE TIME) [Function] Used to set the wait time before entering the light quantity level stable evaluation process in the light quantity stable process of white balance. (Note: The light quantity stable level in the previous light quantity stable state is used as the target. When the light quantity level reaches the target during the wait time, the set time of this test command is ignored and the operation enters the stable evaluation process.) When this test command is executed, the currently set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. Setting range: 0 99 (Complying with the light quantity stable wait time of 0 99sec.) Default: 15 (15sec) [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 9-04.
Main code 63
Sub code 13
Contents Light quantity stable width setting (LT.STABLE RNG.)
Details of function/operation [Function] When the difference between the maximum and the minimum values of the light quantity level sampled for 3.2sec in the cycle of 100msec in the white balance light quantity stable process is within the range set with this test command, it is judged as the light quantity is stable. (Note: The magnification ratio of the AFE gain setting is automatically reflected on the stable width.) When this test command is executed, the currently set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. Setting range: 1 99 (Light quantity stable width: Complying with 1 99 in 4095 gradations.) Default: 16 [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 9-04. [Function] The status of the optical section is ignored and printing of one page is made. Also when the print command is received from the host, printing is made. When this test command is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted. (Since, however, the scanner is disabled, initializing is not made.) Enter the code number and press [ENTER/START] key to start paper feed from the selected cassette and print in the selected pattern. Code number 0 1 2 3
For 4 99, flip.
64
01
Self print (1by2 mode) (SELF PRT.)
Pattern 1by2 Grid pattern White paper Black background
Display item 1 BY 2 CHECK WHITE BLACK
66
01
FAX soft SW setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] Use to check the FAX soft SW setting. Every time when the key is pressed, the bit on the first line is switched 0 and 1. [Operation] 1) Initial display ENTER FAX SOFT SW. # (3 DIGITS) SW.___
3) Select 1 No.### xxxxxxxx USE # KEY 12345678 4) Change with 1-8 of [10KEY] and the press [ENTER] key. No.### STORED? xxxxxxxx 1:YES 2:NO
2) Enter a 3-digit value of soft SW No. (To enter the fourth digit, shift to the left.), and the press [ENTER] key. No.### CHANGE? xxxxxxxx 1:YES 2:NO
"xxxxxxxx" is the set content.

Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry
"xxxxxxxx" is the set content.

Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry
display. 5) Select 1 STORED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
display.
02
FAX soft SW initializing (excluding the adjustment values) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] Use to initializing FAX soft SW. [Operation] 1) Initial display INITIALIZED After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
Main code 66
Sub code 03
Contents FAX PWB memory check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] Use to check the FAX PWB memory. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT CHECK MEMORY PRESS , 2) [/] or after 2sec Every time when [] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 2 3 1. When [] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT MEMORY (1-3) 1:DRAM SELECT MEMORY (1-3) 2:SRAM SELECT MEMORY (1-3) 3:FLASH
3) [ENTER] key CHECKING MEMORY 4) After completion of check When the result is OK MEMORY CHECK RESULT OK In case of sum check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX SUM NG In case of address bus check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX A-BUS NG In case of data check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX DATA NG In case of data bus check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX D-BUS NG In case of erase check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX ERASE NG
04
Signal send mode (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] Use to set the signal send mode (Max. value). Facsimile test command design specifications. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 NO SIGNAL 33600bps(V34) 31200bps(V34) 28800bps(V34) 26400bps(V34) 24000bps(V34) 21600bps(V34) 19200bps(V34) 16800bps(V34) 14400bps(V34) 12000bps(V34) 9600bps(V34) 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7200bps(V34) 4800bps(V34) 2400bps(V34) 14400bps(V33) 12000bps(V33) 14400bps(V17) 12000bps(V17) 9600bps(V17) 7200bps(V17) 9600bps(V29) 7200bps(V29) 4800bps(V27ter) 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 2400bps(V27ter) 300bps(FLAG) 2100Hz(CED) 1100Hz(CNG) 300bps(V21) 2100Hz(ANSam) DUMMY RING NO VOICE ANSWER NO RING BACK TONE LINE OFF HOOK LINE ON HOOK
[Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL (2 DIGITS) No.___ 2) 2-digit (1-35) with [10KEY] / [/] / 2sec after Pressing [] key or [] key reverses the sequence. No. (1-35) 1:NO SIGNAL ..... No. (1-35) 35:LINE ON HOOK
3) [ENTER] key Send after setting OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
Main code 66
Sub code 05
Contents Signal send mode (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] Use to set the signal send mode (Soft SW set value). Facsimile test command design specifications. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 NO SIGNAL 33600bps(V34) 31200bps(V34) 28800bps(V34) 26400bps(V34) 24000bps(V34) 21600bps(V34) 19200bps(V34) 16800bps(V34) 14400bps(V34) 12000bps(V34) 9600bps(V34) 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7200bps(V34) 4800bps(V34) 2400bps(V34) 14400bps(V33) 12000bps(V33) 14400bps(V17) 12000bps(V17) 9600bps(V17) 7200bps(V17) 9600bps(V29) 7200bps(V29) 4800bps(V27ter) 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 2400bps(V27ter) 300bps(FLAG) 2100Hz(CED) 1100Hz(CNG) 300bps(V21) 2100Hz(ANSam) DUMMY RING NO VOICE ANSWER NO RING BACK TONE LINE OFF HOOK LINE ON HOOK
[Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL (2 DIGITS) No.___ 2) 2-digit (1-35) with [10KEY] / [/] / 2sec after Pressing [] key or [] key reverses the sequence. No. (1-35) 1:NO SIGNAL 3) [ENTER] key Send after setting OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
.....
No. (1-35) 35:LINE ON HOOK
07
Image memory content print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] Use to print the image memory content. [Operation] When print is allowed PRINT STORED After completion of printing, FAX control is terminated. When there is no print data NO DATA After 2 sec, FAX control is terminated. When print is inhibited CAN NOT PRINT After 2 sec, FAX control is terminated.
10
Image memory content clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] Use to clear the image memory content. [Operation] When there are some print data CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY After completion of memory clear, the buzzer sounds. CLEARED PLEASE POWER OFF Remains unchanged until the power is turned off. When there are no print data CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY After completion of memory clear CLEARED After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
Main code 66
Sub code 11
Contents 300bps signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] Use to set the 300bps signal send (Max. value). 1: NO SIGNAL 2: 11111 3: 11110 4: 00000 5: 010101 6: 00001 [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL PRESS , 2) [/] or after 2sec Every time when [] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 1. When [] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 1:NO SIGNAL 3) [ENTER] key OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
.....
SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 6:00001
12
300bps signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] Use to set the 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value). 1: NO SIGNAL 2: 11111 3: 11110 4: 00000 5: 010101 6: 00001 [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL PRESS , 2) [/] or after 2sec Every time when [] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 1. When [] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 1:NO SIGNAL 3) [ENTER] key OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
.....
SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 6:00001
Main code 66
Sub code 13
Contents Dial test (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to the dial test. [Operation] Dial test (PULSE) 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL 1:PULSE 2:DTMF
Dial test (DTMF) 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL 1:PULSE 2:DTMF

[CLEAR] key: FAX control is termi-
nated. 2) Select 1 INPUT MAKE TIME (0-15) __
2)
Select 2
SELECT HIGH LEVEL 1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW. 3) Select 1 Select 2 __
3) Enter the make time in 2 digits. INPUT DIAL # XXXX XXXX: Default
After deleting with [CLEAR] key,
INPUT VALUE (0-15)
SELECT LOW LEVEL 1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW. 4) Select 1 INPUT DIAL # XXXX XXXX: Default
After deleting with [CLEAR] key, input can be
input can be made. 4) [ENTER] key SEND yyPPS xxms 1:YES 2:NO "yy" is the selected pulse 10 or 20. "xx" is the input value.
Select 2: Returns to 2) display.
Select 2 __
INPUT VALUE (0-15)
5) Select 1 Switched to 10/20PPS set with pulse selection inside. 6) After setting SENDING yyPPS xxms 7) After completion of sending TERMINATE ? 1:YES 2:NO
made. 4) [ENTER] key H:xx 1:YES 2:NO L:yy
"xx" indicates HI, and "yy" indicates Low Soft SW.

5) Select 1 HI/LO is selected with the signal level inside. 6) After setting the signal send level SENDING DTMF 7) After completion of sending TERMINATE ? 1:YES 2:NO
8) Select 1 TERMINATED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
8) Select 1 TERMINATED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display". 17 DTMF signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the DTMF signal send (Max. value). [Operation] 1) Initial display INPUT DIAL #
3) Communication is started after setting the signal send level. SENDING SIGNAL MAX PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
2) [10KEY] input The content selected with signal send level selection is set inside.
Main code 66
Sub code 18
Contents DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] Use to set the DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value). [Operation] 1) Initial display INPUT DIAL #
3) Communication is started after setting the signal send level. SENDING SIGNAL SSW PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
2) [10KEY] input The content selected with signal send level selection is set inside. 21 FAX information print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to print the FAX information. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT REPORT (1-3) PRESS , 2) [/] or after 2sec
Every time when [] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 2 3 1. When [] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT REPORT (1-3) 1:USER SW. LIST SELECT REPORT (1-3) 2:SOFT SW. LIST SELECT REPORT (1-3) 3:PROTOCOL
3) [ENTER] key When print is allowed PRINT STORED After completion of printing, FAX control is terminated. 24 FAST SRAM clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to clear the FAST SRAM. [Operation] 1) Initial display CLEAR FAST SRAM 2) After completion of clearing CLEARED After 2sec, FAX control is terminated. 30 TEL/LIU status change check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to check the TEL/LIU status change. [Operation] 1) Initial display HS2 :xxx RHS :xxx HS1 :xxx EXHS:xxx
When print is inhibited CAN NOT PRINT After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
The display is switched every 2sec.
CHECKING PRESS CLEAR TO STOP

Main code 66
Sub code 33
Contents Signal detection check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] Use to check the signal detection. [Operation] 1) Initial display CHECKING NONE PRESS CLEAR TO STOP When a signal is detected, the display is changed from NONE to the following. CI/CNG/CED/BT/DT/Flag/SDT/DTMF
34
Communication time measurement (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] Use to measurement the communication time. [Operation] 1) Initial display COMM. TIME xx:xx:xx:xxx msec "xx:xx:xx:xxx" indicates o'clock, minute, second, millisecond.
37
Speaker sound volume setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] Use to set the speaker sound volume. 1: NO SOUND 2: LOW 3: MID 4: HIGH [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT SPEEKER VOL. PRESS , 2) [/] or after 2sec Every time when [] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 2 3 4 1. When [] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT (1-4) 1:NO SOUND 3) [ENTER] key STORED xxx xxx: Set content After 2sec, FAX control is terminated. SELECT (1-4) 2:LOW .....
Main code 66
Sub code 38
Contents Time setting/check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to check the time setting. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT TO SET 1:DATE 2:TIME
2) Select 1 xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO "xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)" is the current value. (No revision of display) 3) Select 1 INPUT YEAR (4 DIGITS)____.__.__
Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".
2) Select 2 xx:xx CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO
"xx:xx" is the current value. 3) Select 1 INPUT HOUR (0-24) __:__
4) Enter the year in 4 digits. INPUT MONTH (1-12) 1998.__.__ 5) Enter the month in 2 digits. INPUT DAY (1-31) 1998.01.__ 6) Enter the day in 2 digits. xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) STORED? 1:YES 2:NO "xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) is the entered value.
4) Enter o'clock in 2 digits. INPUT MINUTE (00-59) 01:__
5) Enter minute in 2 digits. xx:xx STORED? 1:YES 2:NO
"xx:xx" is the current value.

6) Select 1 STORED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
7) Select 1 STORED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
5. Trouble codes
A. Trouble codes list
Main Sub Details of trouble code code E7 01 Duplex model memory setup error, memory notdetected error 02 LSU trouble 10 Shading trouble (Black correction) 11 Shading trouble (White correction) 16 Abnormal laser output F2 02 Toner supply abnormality 04 Improper cartridge (Destination error, life cycle error) F5 02 Copy lamp lighting abnormality H2 00 Thermistor open H3 00 Heat roller high temperature detection H4 00 Heat roller low temperature detection L1 00 Feeding is not completed within the specified time after starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch is locked) L3 00 Scanner return trouble L4 01 Main motor lock detection 32 Exhaust fan motor lock detection trouble L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection U2 04 EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication error) 11 Counter check sum error (EEPROM) 40 CRUM chip communication error Main Sub Details of trouble code code E7 10 Content Shading trouble (Black correction) Detail The CCD black scan level is abnormal when the shading. Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat cable CCD unit abnormality MCU PWB abnormality Check Check connection of the CCD unit flat cable. and Check the CCD unit. remedy 11 Content Shading trouble (White correction) Detail The CCD white scan level is abnormal when the shading. Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat cable Dirt on the mirror, the lens, and the reference white plate Copy lamp lighting abnormality CCD unit abnormality MCU PWB abnormality (When occurred in the RSPF scan position.) Improper installation of the mirror unit Check Clean the mirror, lens, and the reference and white plate. remedy Check the light quantity and lighting status of the copy lamp (TC 5-03). Check the MCU PWB. 16 Content Abnormal laser output Detail When the laser output is stopped, HSYNC is detected. Cause Laser abnormality MCU PWB abnormality. Check Check the laser emitting diode operation. and Replace the MCU PWB. remedy F2 02 Content Toner supply abnormality Detail The maximum toner supply time is greatly exceeded. Cause CRUM chip trouble Improper developing unit Check Replace the CRUM chip. and Replace the developing unit. remedy 04 Content Improper cartridge (Destination error, life cycle error) Detail The destination of the main unit differs from that of the CRUM. When the life cycle information is other than Not Used (FFh). Cause CRUM chip trouble Improper developing unit Check Replace the CRUM chip. and Replace the developing unit. remedy
B. Details of trouble codes

Main Sub Details of trouble code code E7 01 Content Duplex model memory setup error, memory not-detected error Detail The memory is not set properly or the memory capacity is not set to the duplex setup (6M). Check Set TC 26-39 code number to 2. and remedy 02 Content LSU trouble Detail The BD signal from the LSU cannot be detected in a certain cycle. (Always OFF or always ON) Cause LSU connector or LSU harness defect or disconnection Polygon motor rotation abnormality Laser beams are not generated. MCU PWB abnormality. Check Check connection of the LSU connector. and Execute TC 61-03 to check the LSU remedy operations. Check that the polygon motor rotates normally. Check that the laser emitting diode generates laser beams. Replace the LSU unit. Replace the MCU PWB.
Main Sub Details of trouble code code F5 02 Content Copy lamp lighting abnormality Detail The copy lamp does not turn on. Cause Copy lamp abnormality Copy lamp harness abnormality CCD PWB harness abnormality. Check Use TC 5-03 to check the copy lamp and operations. remedy When the copy lamp lights up. Check the harness and the connector between the CCD unit and the MCU PWB. When the copy lamp does not light up. Check the harness and the connector between the copy lamp unit and the MCU PWB. Replace the copy lamp unit. Replace the MCU PWB. H2 00 Content Thermistor open Detail The thermistor is open. The fusing unit is not installed. Cause Thermistor abnormality Control PWB abnormality Fusing section connector disconnection The fusing unit is not installed. Check Check the harness and the connector between the thermistor and the PWB. and remedy Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic display. H3 00 Content Heat roller high temperature detection Detail The fusing temperature exceeds 240C. Cause Thermistor abnormality Control PWB abnormality Fusing section connector disconnection. Check Use TC 5-02 to check the heater lamp blinking operation. and remedy When the lamp blinks normally. Check the thermistor and its harness. Check the thermistor input circuit on the control PWB. When the lamp keeps ON. Check the power PWB and the lamp control circuit on the MCU PWB. Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic display.
Main Sub Details of trouble code code H4 00 Content Heat roller low temperature detection Detail 1) When the target temperature (165C) is not reached in 55 sec after starting warming-up. 2) When the temperature below 100C is detected for 300ms under the ready print state. "Starting warming-up" means not only that in power supply but also reset that in reset from shut-off and in side door close. (The timing of generating H4 is not limited to that in power supply.) Cause Thermistor abnormality Heater lamp abnormality Thermostat abnormality Control PWB abnormality Check Use TC 5-02 to check the heater lamp and blinking operation. remedy When the lamp blinks normally. Check the thermistor and its harness. Check the thermistor input circuit on the control PWB. When the lamp does not light up. Check for disconnection of the heater lamp and the thermostat. Check the interlock switch. Check the power PWB and the lamp control circuit on the MCU PWB. Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic display. L1 00 Content Feeding is not completed within the specified time after starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch is locked) Detail Though the mirror base is shifted by about 30mm, the MHPS is not turned OFF. Cause The scan head is locked by the lock switch. Mirror unit abnormality The scanner wire is disconnected. The origin detection sensor abnormality Mirror motor harness abnormality Check Check to confirm that the scan head lock switch is released. and remedy Use TC 1-01 to check the mirror reciprocating operations. When the mirror does not feed. Check for disconnection of the scanner wire. Check the harness and the connector between the mirror motor and the MCU PWB. Replace the mirror unit. Replace the MCU PWB. When the mirror does feed. Use TC 1-02 to check the mirror home position sensor.
Main Sub Details of trouble code code L3 00 Content Scanner return trouble Detail When the mirror base is returned for the specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing after turning on the power, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON. Or when the mirror base is returned for the specified time (about 6 sec) after start of copy return, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON. Cause Mirror unit abnormality Scanner wire disconnection Origin detection sensor abnormality Mirror motor harness abnormality Check Use TC 1-01 to check the mirror and reciprocating operations. remedy When the mirror does not return. Check for disconnection of the scanner wire. Check the harness and the connector between the mirror motor and the MCU PWB. Replace the mirror unit. Replace the MCU PWB. When the mirror does feed. Use TC 1-02 to check the mirror home position sensor. L4 01 Content Main motor lock detection Detail When the main motor encoder pulse is not detected for 1000 msec. Cause Main motor unit abnormality Improper connection or disconnection the main motor and the harness. MCU PWB abnormality Check Use TC 25-01 to check the main motor operations. and remedy Check connection of the main motor harness/connector. Replace the main motor. Replace the MCU PWB. 32 Content Exhaust fan motor lock detection trouble Detail The error detection is started after 2 sec from starting rotation of the exhaust fan motor. 1) The continuous rotation state of 250ms is not detected for 1 sec after starting detection. 2) When the lock sensor (in the exhaust fan) detects the HIGH level (unstable) after detection the lock state (stable state). Cause Exhaust fan motor connector connection trouble Exhaust fan motor trouble MCU PWB trouble Check Exhaust fan motor connector connection and check remedy Exhaust fan motor replacement Replace the MCU PWB.
Main Sub Details of trouble code code L6 10 Content Polygon motor lock detection Detail The lock signal (specified rpm signal) does not return within a certain time (about 20 sec) from starting the polygon motor rotation. Cause Polygon motor unit abnormality Improper connection or disconnection of the polygon motor and the harness. MCU PWB abnormality Check Use TC 61-01 to check the polygon motor and operations. remedy Check connection of the polygon motor harness/connector. Replace the polygon motor. Replace the MCU PWB. U2 04 Content EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication error) Detail EEPROM access process error Cause EEPROM abnormality Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set. and Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power. remedy Replace the MCU PWB. 11 Content Counter check sum error (EEPROM) Detail Check sum error of the counter area in the EEPROM Cause EEPROM abnormality Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set. and Use TC 16 to cancel the trouble. remedy Replace the MCU PWB. 40 Content CRUM chip communication error Detail An error occurs in MCU-CRUM chip communication. Cause CRUM chip trouble Defective contact of developing unit MCU PWB trouble Check Replace the CRUM chip. and Check installation of the developing unit. remedy Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power. Replace the MCU PWB.
[11] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance table
: Check (Clean, adjust, or replace when required.) Section Developing Parts Developer DV blade DV side seal (F/R) DV doctor Drum 25K 50K 75K : Clean 100K : Replace 125K : Adjust Remark
: Lubricate
White streaks are made on the image.
Process peripheral
2. Maintenance display system

Toner Life Remaining quantity LED Machine Life LED Machine NEAR EMPTY About 12.5% ON Operation allowed 8K EMPTY Flash Stop 25K
Developer
ON at 25K of the developer count. Selection is available between Not Stop and Stop by Service Simulation (SIM 26-37) Setup. (If Stop is selected, the LED will flash and stop at 25K.) Default: Not Stop Clear: SIM 24-06 Selection is available among 25K, 13K, 9K, 6K, 3K, and free (no lighting) with SIM 21-1. Default: 25K Clear: SIM 20-1 Not stop.
Maintenance
LED
Machine
Note: When developer is replaced, be sure to execute simulation No. 24-06 to reset the counter.
3. Remaining toner indication

TONER FULL Remaining toner indication 100% Display for users
75%
Lo 50% 25% LOW LEVEL
100-76%
75-51%
50-26%
25-13%
12.5% or less
The remaining toner indication is based on the number of revolutions of the toner motor. The toner END indication appears when the END is detected by the toner sensor. The remaining toner indication is a rough indication of the remaining toner quantity.
AR-208S/208D
MAINTENANCE 11 - 1
[12] USER PROGRAM

The user settings consist of the following items.
1. User programs
A. Copy mode
Program number 1 Setting codes Program name AUTO CLEAR (factory default setting appears in bold) 1: 10 SEC. 2: 30 SEC. 3: 60 SEC. 4: 90 SEC. 5: 120 SEC. 6: OFF 1: 30 SEC. 2: 1 MIN. 3: 5 MIN. 4: 30 MIN. 5: 60 MIN. 6: 120 MIN. 7: 240 MIN. 1: ON 2: OFF 1: 5 MIN. 2: 30 MIN. 3: 60 MIN. 4: 120 MIN. 5: 240 MIN. Explanation Auto clear time automatically returns the copy settings to the initial settings if no keys are pressed for a preset period of time following the end of a copy job. This program is used to select the period of time. Auto clear time can also be disabled. This function automatically switches the machine to a low power consumption state if the set duration of time elapses without the machine being used when the power is on. The power save indicator lights up, however, the keys on the operation panel can be used. Normal operation automatically resumes when a key on the operation panel is pressed, an original is placed, a print job is received. Use this setting to enable or disable auto power shut-off mode. This function automatically switches the machine to a state that consumes even less power than preheat mode if the set duration of time elapses without the machine being used when the power is on. All lights except the power save indicator go off. To resume normal operation, press the [START] key. Normal operation also resumes automatically when a print job is received or scanning is begun from a computer. While in auto power shut-off mode, no keys (except the [START] key) can be used. Use this setting to select the layout pattern when two original pages are copied onto a single sheet of paper. When enabled, this function offsets the position of each set of copies in the output tray in copy mode, and each print job in printer mode. When two-sided copying is performed, this function rotates the image on the back of the original. This is convenient when binding the copies at the top (tablet binding). This setting is used to change the copy resolution in AUTO and TEXT mode from 600 x 300 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi (high-quality mode). Scanning is slower when high-quality mode is used. If the memory fills up when two-sided copying is performed, "NORMAL" can be selected to make copying possible. However, "NORMAL" results in a slower copying speed. Normally "HI-SPEED" is selected to enable fast two-sided copying. Use this setting to set the margin width.
PREHEAT MODE
3 4
AUTO SHUT-OFF AUTO SHUT-OFF TIME
7 8 9
LAYOUT IN 2IN1 OFFSET FUNCTION ROTATE ORIG. IMAGE (AR-208D only) AE/TEXT RESOLUTION 2-SIDED COPY MODE (AR-208D only) MARGIN WIDTH
1: PATTERN 1 2: PATTERN 2 1: ON 2: OFF 1: ON 2: OFF 1: 300dpi 2: 600dpi 1: HI-SPEED 2: NORMAL
10
11
12
1: 1/4" 2: 1/2" 3: 3/4" 4: 1" 1: 30% 2: 40% 3: 50% 4: 60% 5: 70% 1: ON 2: OFF
13
MEM. FOR PRINTER
Use this to change the proportion of machine memory used for printer mode.
14
AUTO KEY REPEAT
Use this setting to select whether or not holding down a key causes repeated input of the key. For keys that normally cause a set value to decrease or increase when held down (for example, the [<] key (v) or [>] key (^)), this program can be used to have the set value not change when the key is held down. Use this setting to select how long a key must be pressed for the input to be accepted. By selecting a longer time, you can prevent settings from being changed by the accidental pressing of a key.
15
KEY PRESS TIME
1: NORMAL 2: 0.5 SEC. 3: 1.0 SEC. 4: 1.5 SEC. 5: 2.0 SEC. 1: LOW 2: HIGH 3: OFF
16
KEY TOUCH SOUND
This sets the volume of beep signals.
AR-208S/208D
USER PROGRAM 12 - 1
Program number 17 18 19
Setting codes Program name SOUND AT DEFAULT TONER SAVE MODE AE LEVEL ADJUST (factory default setting appears in bold) 1: ON 2: OFF 1: ON 2: OFF 1: SPF/RSPF (Adjustment to 5 levels is possible.) 2: DOCUMENT GLASS (Adjustment to 5 levels is possible.) 1: AMERICAN ENGLISH 2: ENGLISH 3: FRENCH 4: SPANISH : : 1: Yes 2: No 1: ON 2: OFF 1: ON 2: OFF 1: 8.5x11 2: 5.5x8.5 1: ON 2: OFF 1: PLAIN PAPER 2: HEAVY PAPER 1: LIGHTER 2: LIGHT 3: NORMAL 4: DARK 5: DARKER Explanation Use this to sound a beep when a base setting is selected. This mode reduces toner usage by about 10% when copying. Toner save mode is effective when the exposure mode is AUTO or TEXT. This is used to adjust the exposure level. The automatic exposure level can be adjusted separately for the document glass and the RSPF. For the procedure for adjusting the exposure and guidelines for numeric values. The factory default setting for the exposure level is center. This is used to set the language used in the display.
20
LANGUAGE
21 22 24
RESET FACTORY SORT AUTO SELECT CHECK RSPF OPEN VALID COPY WIDTH LSU SETTING PAPER TYPE DISPLAY CONTRAST
This is used to return all settings to the factory default settings. Use this setting to enable or disable sort auto select mode. You can set the operation that takes place if the [START] key is pressed when the RSPF is not completely closed. (Valid only when the multi-bypass paper feed is used.) Set the allowed paper sizes for copying from the bypass tray. When "5.5x8.5" is selected, a copy of a letter size original will only be printed up to invoice size. Select whether copying is only allowed when the polygon motor is rotating, or also when the polygon motor is stopped. Set the temperature of the fusing unit when the bypass tray is used. Normally "PLAIN PAPER" should be selected. Set the contrast of the display.
25
28 29 30
B. Print mode
Program number 1 Setting codes Program name FORCED OUTPUT (factory default setting appears in bold) 1: ON 2: OFF 1: FULL-SPEED 2: HI-SPEED Explanation When this function is enabled, printing in printer mode will automatically continue using a different size of paper if the specified size of paper runs out in all trays. This feature does not function in copy mode. This sets the USB 2.0 data transfer speed. To obtain the fastest speed when using the USB 2.0 connector, first verify that your computer meets the system requirements (operating system and driver), and then use this program to change the USB 2.0 mode to "Hi-Speed". Note that the setting should not be changed while running a TWAIN driver. If the paper runs out during printing and there is paper of the same size in another tray, this function automatically switches to that tray (excluding the bypass tray). The function can be disabled.
USB 2.0 MODE SWITCH *1
AUTO TRAY SWITCH*2
1: ON 2: OFF
*1: The scanning speed increases when the USB 2.0 mode is set to "HI-SPEED", however, the printing speed does not increase considerably. *2: When the 250-sheet paper feed unit is installed.
AR-208S/208D
USER PROGRAM 12 - 2
2. Selecting a setting for a user program

1) Press the [MENU] key and then press the [ENTER] key. In printer mode, the user programs are accessed by simply pressing the [MENU] key.
MAIN MENU 1:USER PROGRAM
Audible signals (key entry beep, invalid key beep, base setting beep) The machine sounds three different types of beep signals: a key entry beep that sounds when a valid key is pressed, an invalid key beep that sounds when an invalid key is pressed, and a base setting beep that sounds when a setting is the same as the base setting (base settings are explained below). The base setting beep is initially disabled. If you wish to enable the base setting beep, see "SOUND AT DEFAULT". If you wish to change the volume of the beep signals or disable them, see "KEY TOUCH SOUND". The beep patterns of each type of beep signal are as follows: Key entry beep: One beep Base setting beep: Three beeps Base settings The base settings are preset standard selections for each copy setting. The base settings are as follows: Copy ratio: 100% Light and Dark level: Center Paper feed location: Tray 1 (Upper paper tray) AUTO/TEXT/PHOTO: AUTO Invalid key beep: Two beeps
2)
Press the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^] to select the item that you wish to configure in the USER PROGRAM items, and then press the [ENTER] key. See "1. User programs" for the program name and program code. You can also select a program by directly entering the program number with the numeric keys.
USER PROGRAM 2:PREHEAT MODE
3)
Press the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^] to change the setting of the selected item. See "1. User programs" for the program code.
PREHEAT MODE 1:1 MIN
NOTE: If you mistakenly select the wrong item, press the [CLEAR] key [C] and repeat the procedure from step 2). To cancel a setting for a user program, press the [MENU] key. 4) Press the [ENTER] key. Your selection appears briefly and then the previous screen appears. NOTE: When "AE LEVEL ADJUST" is selected in the user programs and the [ENTER] key is pressed, the automatic exposure adjustment screen appears. Adjust the exposure and press the [ENTER] key.
AR-208S/208D
USER PROGRAM 12 - 3
Carriage Unit 3.3V RSPF/SPF Motor CCFL x 2 AD 16bits 8bits (MSB/LSB) Lamp Inverter for CCFL
FAX Model Only
12V
12V
Reg
A5V
1. Block diagram
AFE(HT86V26) HOME POSITION SENSOR AR-FX13
A. Overall block diagram
CCD (ILX558K)
R G B
C D S
A G C
M P X
5V Speaker FAX Main PCBA
CCD Driver
Mechanical Load 0 - 24V FAX I/F 256Mbx2 MHPS D[7..0] RD CS INT 12MHz P-Bus ISP1583 /ESPRD System Reset 3.3V UART Reset IC A[191] D[150] SRAM 1Mbit Flash ROM 16Mbit OPE PWB LED Driver PSL CPUCLK SELIN1,2,3 KEYIN PSL LED HC151 8bit KEY Matrix HC238 (3 to 8 decode) 8bit START KEY Buzzer KEY Matrix EEPROM CPU CLK (19.6608MHz) Driver Driver LCD (2 x 20) LCD E LCD RS LCD R/W (TBD) LCD DB7-4 LED FAX Model Only FAX OPE PWB AR-FX13 LED SPID SRJD SCOD OP-CLK OP-LATCH OP-DATA CPU H8S/2321 (19.6608MHz) NW PWB 18.3856MHz CPU I/O Interlock SW Cassette detector X 2 Drum Initial detector PPD1 POD MFD PPD2 OA982 USB2.0 High-speed SDRAM Flash ROM 8Mb or 16Mb AR-NB2A (AR Option) MPFS,RRS,CPFS1 (RSPF UNIT) SPUS,SRVC DC-DC Driver SDRAM 8Mbyte 3.3V PWM
MCU-PWB
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION
RJ45 (N/W connector)
NIC PCBA (AL Model only)
1284 I/F
Ether Chip RTL8019AS Image BUS(PI-Bus) Image BUS(PO-Bus)
CPU uPD703100
FPGA
Printer CLK
8 8
Network Box 100Base-T
Ethernet
Sensor/SW (Electorical detector/SW/Sensor) CPU INTERRUPT SPPD
FlashROM 1Mbit
SRAM 256kbit
18.3856MHz
KRONOS ASIC (296pin)
SSCG Scanner CLK (12MHz x4 48MHz)
Duplex Model Only
Duplex Motor KEYSCAN1 - 3 IO ASIC D[158] PSW SSCG I2C Bus 8Kbyte
Driver
Shifter Motor
Fan Motor PMRDY PMD PMCLK
24V 12V
Driver
/MMD
MMCLK
/MMLD
AR-208S/208D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 1

EEPROM (AR Model Only) (CRUM) Toner Motor LSU POWER SUPPLY LASER /POFF,HL,PR FW 3.3V,5VEN,5V,12V,24V Polygon Motor HVU TC, GRID, MC, BIAS Mirror Motor AC Code
Driver
2nd Cassette
Main Motor
Mechanical load CPFS2
Sensor/SW PPD3, PD2, CED2
2. Signal name list

Signal name (ADCLK) (AFE_DB0) (AFE_DB1) (AFE_DB2) (AFE_DB3) (AFE_DB4) (AFE_DB5) (AFE_DB6) (AFE_DB7) (AFE_SCK) (AFE_SDI) (AFE_SEN) (BSAMP) (VSAMP) /BIAS /CPFS1 /CPFS2 /DMT_0 /DMT_1 /DMT_2 /DMT_3 /FAX_RST /GRIDL /LDEN /MC /MDM_IRQ /MMCLK /MMD /MPFS /PMD /POFF /PR /RD /RRS /RSV_SOL /SFTMT0 /SFTMT1 /SFTMT2 /SFTMT3 /SPUS /SRVC /SYNC /TC /VFMCNT /VIDEO BZR CCD-CP CCD-RS CCD-TG CCD_PHI1 CCD_PHI2 CED1 CED2 DVSEL FANLK FW HLOUT KEYIN KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 LCDCON LCDDB4 Name AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE HV bias signal 1st CS pickup solenoid 2nd CS pickup solenoid DUP motor DUP motor DUP motor DUP motor FAX PWB reset signal HV grid signal Laser HV MC signal FAX PWB interrupt Main motor Main motor Multi bypass solenoid Polygon motor Low voltage power Heater lamp Control signal 1st transport solenoid Reverse solenoid Shifter motor Shifter motor Shifter motor Shifter motor Paper feed solenoid Reverse clutch Laser HV TC signal Fan speed signal Laser Buzzer signal CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD Machine cassette detection 2nd CS cassette detection Developing tank detection Fusing fan Low voltage power Heater lamp Key scan input Key scan output Key scan output Key scan output LCD control signal LCD data signal Function/Operation AFE control signal Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data AFE control signal AFE serial data AFE control signal AFE control signal AFE control signal HV bias drive Section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Process section Paper transport section 2nd cassette section Duplex drive section Duplex drive section Duplex drive section Duplex drive section FAX optional section Process section LSU Process section FAX optional section Main drive section Main drive section Paper transport section LSU Power section Power section FAX optional section Paper transport section RSPF section Shifter motor section Shifter motor section Shifter motor section Shifter motor section RSPF section RSPF section LSU Process section Optical section LSU Operation section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Paper transport section 2nd cassette section Developing section Optical section Power section Power section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section
DUP motor phase control DUP motor phase control DUP motor phase control DUP motor phase control Main charger grid control Laser circuit control signal Main charger control Clock signal to the polygon motor Polygon motor drive signal Polygon motor drive signal Output power control Power relay control MCU bus control signal
Shifter motor phase control Shifter motor phase control Shifter motor phase control Shifter motor phase control
Horizontal sync signal from the LSU Transfer charger grid control Fan rotation speed control Laser drive signal Buzzer CCD control signal CCD control signal CCD control signal CCD control signal CCD control signal
Fan lock detection signal Zero cross detection Heater lamp control Key detection control Key scan output Key scan output Key scan output Signal for LCD Signal for LCD
Signal name LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 LCDE LCDRS LEDPOD LEDPPD1 LEDPPD2 LEDSCOD LEDSPID LEDSPPD LEDSRJD MCU_D0 MCU_D1 MCU_D2 MCU_D3 MCU_D4 MCU_D5 MCU_D6 MCU_D7 MCU_INT MCU_NCS MHPS MMLD MODEM_IN OP-DATA OP-LATCH OP_CLK OUTA+ OUTAOUTB+ OUTBPB_ADDR0 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR7 PB_DATA0 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA7 PB_NAE0 PB_NCS1 PB_NOE PB_NWE PD1 PD2 PMCLK_A PMRDY POD PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 PSL PSW RTH_IN SCOD
Name LCD data signal LCD data signal LCD data signal LCD control signal LCD control signal POD sensor power PPD sensor power PPD2 sensor power SCOD sensor power SPID sensor power SPPD sensor power SRJD sensor power Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal MCU interrupt Control signal MHPS sensor Main motor FAX connection detection signal LED driver control LED driver control LED driver control Scanner motor Scanner motor Scanner motor Scanner motor Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Control signal Control signal Control signal Control signal PD SW sensor PD2 SW sensor Polygon motor Polygon motor POD sensor PPD sensor PPD2 sensor PPD3 sensor Power save LED Start button control Thermistor SCOD sensor
Function/Operation Signal for LCD Signal for LCD Signal for LCD Signal for LCD Signal for LCD
MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal Carriage HP detection Polygon motor ON/OFF detection signal
Scanner motor phase control Scanner motor phase control Scanner motor phase control Scanner motor phase control Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal 1st CS paper width sensor 2nd CS paper width detection Clock signal to the polygon motor Polygon motor ON/OFF detection signal Paper transport detection Paper transport detection Paper transport detection 2nd CS paper transport detection
Fusing section thermistor temperature detection RSPF cover open sensor
Section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Paper exit section Paper transport section Fusing section RSPF section RSPF section RSPF section RSPF section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section Optical section Main drive section FAX optional section Operation section Operation section Operation section Optical drive section Optical drive section Optical drive section Optical drive section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section Paper transport section 2nd cassette section LSU LSU Paper exit section Paper transport section Fusing section 2nd cassette section Operation section Operation section Fusing section RSPF section
Signal name SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 SHOLD SPID SPMT_0 SPMT_1 SPMT_2 SPMT_3 SPPD SRJD TCS TMA_O TMB_O USB +D USB -D VCL VFMOUT
Name Select signal Select signal Select signal Laser SPID sensor RSPF motor RSPF motor RSPF motor RSPF motor SPPD sensor SRJD sensor Toner sensor Toner motor Toner motor USB signal USB signal Copy lamp Fusing fan
Function/Operation HC151 select signal HC151 select signal HC151 select signal Laser APC signal RSPF UN paper entry sensor RSPF motor phase control RSPF motor phase control RSPF motor phase control RSPF motor phase control RSPF transport detection RSPF paper exit sensor Toner quantity detection Toner motor phase control Toner motor phase control
Copy lamp control Fan drive signal
Section Operation section Operation section Operation section LSU RSPF section RSPF section RSPF section RSPF section RSPF section RSPF section RSPF section Developing section Toner motor drive section Toner motor drive section USB section USB section Scanner unit section Optical section
MCU PWB (CPU section)

VCC3 VCC3 C1 15PF R2 NM TP2 R3 C3 100P BR4 NM C6 R12 22J /ES_SRDY ES_CMD ES_STS 10KJX4 DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3 R392 10KJ /RES_NIC BR11 1KJ 33J 33J RSV_IN0 TP7 /CS5# D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 BR6 BR7 12P 10KJX4 CCD_TG P60 R11 10KJ EXTAL /PRINTST /ES_PAGE R5 R9 10KJ 10KJ D11 D10 D9 D8 100P 10KJX4 10KJX4 X1 AT-49 19.6608MHz R20 330J R8 C4 0J R4 NM XTAL 0.1U IC1 /STBY NMI /WDTOVF C2 BR1 BR2 BR3
1/16
R1
NM
4
TP4 CY25811SC TP5
1. MCU PWB
TP3
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
D15 D14 D13 D12
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
/CS0# /CS1# /CS2# /CS3#
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
10KJX4 BR5
7 6 4 3 VDD FRSEL S0 S1 XIN/CLKIN XOUT SSCLK VSS
TP1 1 8 5 2
R6 0J TP6 C5 15PF
R7
NM
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC
1 2 3 4
10KJX4 R67
8 7 6 5
10KJ
R384 CPUCLK# /RESET1 (3) (5)
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
NM_10KJX4 BR9
(2) /PRINTST (2,3,4,5) /RD (3,4) /HWR (2) /LWR R13 R14 R15 R16 R17 R18 EXTAL XTAL 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 100J
TP724
/PRINTST /RD# /HWR# /LWR# C70 NM
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
NM_10KJX4
CPUCLK /RD# /HWR# /LWR#
4 3 2 1
BR10
5 6 7 8
10KJX4 POFF R19 10KJ
[14] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
(9) (3) (2)
/RES_OA982 /RES_IOASIC /RES_GASIC
/RES_OA982 /RES_IOASIC /RES_GASIC
TP729 TP734 TP735
33P
33P
33P
CPUCLK
/STBY NMI
/WDTOVF
(9) (9) (9) (4) /CS5# P60 CPU3.3 C369 NM C10 NM BR12
ES_STS ES_CMD /ES_SRDY RY/BY
ES_STS ES_CMD /ES_SRDY RY/BY R78 R364 R22 10KJX4
DMT0 (7) DMT1 (7) DMT2 (7) DMT3 (7) MMCLK (6) RESETOUT1 (5) /RES_NIC (15) BZR (11) CRUMSCL (16) CRUMSDA (16) /CS5 (13) DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
SDA SCL
R21 R23
2KJ 2KJ
C7
C8
C9
BR13
TP8 TP9
TP10 TP11 TP12 TP13 TP14 TP15 TP16 TP17
TP19
TP20 TP21
TP22 TP23 TP24 TP25 TP26 TP27 TP28 TP29 TP30 TP31 TP32 TP33 TP34 TP35 TP36
3
102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
IC2
TP37
SPFMT0 SPFMT1 SPFMT2 SPFMT3
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
10KJX4
/SCANSP /TRANSST /SCANST RY/BY
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
10KJX4
TP38 TP41 TP43 TP47
/RES_FAX
/RES_FAX (13)
(6) (6)
RTH (TCS_AN)
RxD TxD CRUMSDA
R24 R53 R52
10KJ 10KJ 10KJ
(6) TP56
LCDCONT
(8) (9)
(PSFANLK) /ES_PAGE
/ES_PAGE
P53/ADTRG P52/SCK2 Vss Vss P51/RxD2 P50/TxD2 PF0/BREQ PF1/BACK PF2/LCAS/ WAIT/BREQO PF3/LWR PF4/HWR PF5/RD PF6/AS VCC PF7/0 Vss EXTAL XTAL VCC STBY NMI RES WDTOVF P20/PO0/TIOCA3 P21/PO1/YICOB3 P22/PO2/TIOCC3 P23/PO3/TIOCD3 P24/PO4/TIOCA4 P25/PO5/TIOCB4 P26/PO6/TIOCA5 P27/PO7/TIOCB5 P63/TEND1 P62/DREQ1 P61/TEND0/CS5 Vss Vss P60/DREQ0/CS4 Vss
(2,5) VIDEO# TP50 TP52 TP54 TP55
R51
33J
PROTECT
SCL RxD SDA TXD POFF
SCL RxD SDA TxD POFF
(4) (12) (4) (12) (6)
1 2 3 4 8 BR17 7 33JX4 6 5
8 BR16 7 33JX4 6 5
D15 D14 D13 D12
/RES_OA982 /RES_GASIC /RES_IOASIC /RES_USB20 /RES_NIC /RES_FAX
R95 R132 R131 R94 R66 R26
10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ
C11
NM
HD6412321VF25(H8S/2321)
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
/SCANSP /SCANST /TRANSST TP62 TP64 TP66 TP68 TP70 TP72 TP73 TP75 TP77
R25
33J
(2) /SCANSP (2) /SCANST (2) /TRANSST (6) PMCLK (5) SPFMT3 (5) SPFMT2/MIRCNT (5) SPFMT1 (5) SPFMT0 (10) /RES_USB20 TP74 TP76 TP78
SPFMT3 SPFMT2 SPFMT1 SPFMT0 /RES_USB20
1 2 3 4 BR18 8 7 33JX4 6 5 8 BR19 7 33JX4 6 5
D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 PG3/CS1 PG4/CS0 Vss NC VCC PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 Vss PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PB0/A8 PB1/A9 PB2/A10 PB3/A11 Vss PB4/A12 PB5/A13 PB6/A14 PB7/A15 PA0/A16 PA1/A17 PA2/A18 PA3/A19 Vss PA4/A20/IRQ4 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA6/A22/IRQ6 PA7/A23/IRQ7 P67/CS7/IRQ3 P66/CS6/IRQ2 Vss Vss P65/IRQ1 P64/IRQ0 AVcc Vref P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6/DA0 P47/AN7/DA1 AVss Vss P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/PO14/TIOCA2 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC P14/PO12/TIOCA1 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0 MD0 MD1 MD2 PG0/CAS PG1/CS3 PG2/CS2 P35/SCK1 P34/SCK0 P33/RxD1 P32/RxD0 P31/TxD1 P30/TxD0 VCC PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 Vss PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0/D8 PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 Vss PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 VCC
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39
BR20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
(3) (2) (4) (4) TP79 TP80 TP81 TP82 TP83 TP84 TP85 TP86 TP87 TP88 TP89 TP90 TP91 TP92 TP93 TP94 TP95 TP96 TP97 TP98 TP99 TP100 TP101 TP102 TP103 TP105 TP106 TP107 TP108 H8S/2321
/CSIOASIC /CSGASIC /CSSRAM /CSFROM
5 6 7 8
4 3 2 1
/CS3# /CS2# /CS1# /CS0#
D[15..0]
(2,3,4,13)
33JX4
C12 22P
C14 NM
C15 NM
BR21 8 7 33JX4 6 5
BR22 8 7 33JX4 6 5
BR23 8 7 33JX4 6 5
1 2 3 4
BR24 8 7 33JX4 6 5
1 2 3 4
BR25 8 7 33JX4 6 5 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
FB1 0J <1608> A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 R50
VCC3
CPU3.3
TP109
L1 NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
33J
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 1

ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC CCD_TG (SPPD) (PSW) ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC mt_at_home# CCD_TG (SPPD) (PSW) (2) (5,9) (2) (5) (2,5) (8) (8) A[20..0] (2,3,4)
C19 10U/10V<2012>
C13 NM
MCU PWB (ASIC section)

TP837 TP879 TP878 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U TP835 PIDATA[7..0] C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 (9) TP874 TP834 TP875 TP873 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U TP836 C38 C39 C40 C41 C42 C43 C44 TP876 33J 12P 12P 12P 12P 12P 12P 12P 12P 33J 10KJ BR29 33JX4 TP877 BR30 C291 C292 C293 C294 C295 C296 C297 C298 /RESET0 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U (4,5,9,12) R41 R39 /OUTCS R40 R38 33J R37 33J 0.1U 0.1U R36 33J R35 33J PIDATA0 PIDATA1 PIDATA2 PIDATA3 0.1U R34 33J R33 33J 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U R32 33J /PCLPRO /FAXPRO /OUTACK /INREQ G3.3V R31 33J R30 33J VCC3 FB2 NM_0J <1608> L2 ZJSR5101-223TA BR26 4 3 2 1 10KJX4 5 6 7 8
2/16
VCC3
(5)
VSAMP
(1,5)
CCD_TG
(5)
CCD_RS
(5)
BSAMP
(5)
CCD_CP
4
JTG_TCK JTG_TMS JTG_TDI JTG_TDO
(5)
AFE_SDI
AFE_SDI
(5)
CCD_PHI2
BR27 4 3 2 1
10KJX4 5 6 7 8
BR28 33JX4 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5
(5)
CCD_PHI1
(5)
AFE_SEN
1 2 3 4
C45
8 7 6 5
PIDATA4 PIDATA5 PIDATA6 PIDATA7
C46 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
(5)
AFE_SCK
(14) AFE_DB[7..0] 0.1U AFE_DB7 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB4 TP848 TP847 TP846 TP845 BR32 C48 JTG_TDO JTG_TDI JTG_TMS JTG_TCK
0.1U
C58 C59 C60 C61 C62 C63 C64 C65 C66 C67 C68 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB0 TP844 TP843 TP842 TP841
1 2 3 4
C49 C50
8 33JX4 7 6 5 8 33JX4 7 6 5
/H_SYNC (9) G3.3V /INREQ /OUTCS /OUTACK /ESPRD /FAXPRO /PCLPRO
0.1U
VCC3
C47
(5)
ADCLK
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
(14) TP110 TP111 TP112 TP113 TP114 TP115 TP116 TP117 TP118 TP119 TP120 TP121 TP122 TP123 TP124 TP125 TP126 TP127 TP128 TP129 TP742 TP741 TP740 TP739 TP738 TP737 TP736 TP325 TP270 TP630 TP628 TP627 TP507 TP500 TP498 TP495 TP493 TP490 TP486 TP471 TP468 TP462 TP403 TP402 TP382 TP364 TP351 TP140 TP130 TP131 TP132 TP133 TP134 TP135 TP136 TP137 TP138 TP139
CL
0.1U
1 2 3 4
C57
47P 47P 47P 47P 47P NM 47P 47P NM 47P NM
C37 10U/10V<2012>
C399 10U/10V<2012>
1 2 3 4 BR31 1 2 3 4 BR33 R42 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149
IC4
AFE_DB7 8 AFE_DB6 7 AFE_DB5 6 AFE_DB4 5 10KJX4 AFE_DB3 8 AFE_DB2 7 AFE_DB1 6 AFE_DB0 5 10KJX4 10KJ AFE_SDI
CLPWM VCC(AC) AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7 GND(AC) AFESCK VCC(CORE) ADCLK GND(CORE) AFE_SEN CCD_PH1 CCD_PH2 AFE_SDI CCD_CP BSAMP CCD_RS CCD_TG VSAMP GND(CORE) TD0 TDI TRSK TMS TCK VCC(CORE) /INREQ /OUTCS /OUTACK /ESPRD /FAXPRD /PCLPRD GND(AC) MDAT15 MDAT14 MDAT13 VCC(CORE) MDAT12 MDAT11 MDAT10 VCC(AC) MDAT09 MDAT08 MDAT07 GND(CORE) MDAT06 MDAT05 MDAT04 VCC(CORE) MDAT03 MDAT02 MDAT01 MDAT00 GND(AC) /INCS /INACK /OUTREQ GND(CORE) /HSYNC PIDATA0 PIDATA1 PIDATA2 VCC(AC) PIDATA3 PIDATA4 PIDATA5 PIDATA6 PIDATA7 /POCS
VCC3 TP141 TP144 TP146 TP148 TP150 R44 33J
3
MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2
BR34 1 2 3 4 TP142 TP143 TP145
10KJX4 8 7 6 5
MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 MM_AI0
/POREQ
(9)
C69
C400 10U/10V<2012>
C401 10U/10V<2012>
(6) (6) (6)
MM_Y3 MM_Y2 MM_Y1
3
PODATA[7..0] (9)
R45 R46
10KJ 10KJ
MM_AI1 MM_AI2
(7) (7) (7)
MM_PH_B MM_BI0 MM_BI1
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 BR35 33JX4
/PIWR /PIACK /POACK /PIREQ
(9) (9) (9) (9)
VCC3
(4) TP163 TP165 33JX4
MAD[12..0]
(7) (7) (7) MM_AI0 MM_AI1 MM_AI2
MM_PH_A MM_AI0 MM_AI1
TP147 TP149 TP151 TP152 TP154 TP156 TP158 TP160 TP153 TP155 TP157 TP159 TP161 TP162 TP164 TP166
R47 10KJ
MAD3 MAD2 MAD1 MAD0
TP817 TP818 TP819 TP820
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
33JX4 TP167 TP169 TP171
PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7
R48 R49
10J 10J
/PR_LINE /SC_LINE /TRANSST /PRINTST /SCANST RCV VPIN VMIN
(9) (9) (1) (1) (1)
MAD10
TP821
(4) (4) (4)
BANK1 BANK0 /SDCS
(4) 33JX4 TP188 TP190 TP192 TP193
RAMDB[15..0]
(4) (4) (4) (4) TP184 TP186
/SDRAS /SDCAS /SDWDE DQM0
VCC3
1 2 3 4 BR36 1 2 3 4 BR37 1 2 3 4 BR38 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5

33JX4 TP196 TP198 TP200 TP202 HG73C141HFV(LF) TP205 TP206 TP174 TP176 TP178 TP180 TP181
TP168 TP170 TP172 TP173 TP175 TP177 TP179 TP182 TP183 TP185 TP187 TP189 TP191
VCC3
PARAD[7..0]
(15)
BR41 1 2 3 4
10KJX4 8 RAMDB7 7 RAMDB6 6 RAMDB5 5 RAMDB4
RAMDB7 RAMDB6 RAMDB5 RAMDB4
TP854 TP855 TP856 TP857
TP891 TP885
MEM_INT CLKSW /POREQ /PIREQ
R356 R357 R358 R359
10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ
ASIC
BR45 1 2 3 4
TP858 TP859 TP860 TP861
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
33JX4 TP209 TP211 TP213 TP214 TP216 TP218 TP220 TP222 TP225 33JX4
2
8 7 6 5
33JX4
TP862 TP863 TP864 TP865
TP194 TP195 TP197 TP199 TP201 TP203 TP204
/REV
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3
BR52 1 2 3 4
10KJX4 8 7 6 5
TP207 TP208 TP210 TP212 TP215 TP217 TP219
/FAULT /ACK BUSY PE SLCT /INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB TP221 TP223 TP224 TP226 TP227 TP230
R54 1 2 3 4 R55
CPU_DATA7 CPU_DATA6 CPU_DATA5 CPU_DATA4 VCC(AC) CPU_DATA3 CPU_DATA2 CPU_DATA1 CPU_DATA0 GND(AC) MIRCNT /CPUSYNC MEM_INT ARB_INT VCC(CORE) CPU_AD8 CPU_AD7 CPU_AD6 CPU_AD5 GND(CORE) RAM_CLK_IN CPU_AD4 CPU_AD3 CPU_AD2 CPU_AD1 CPU_AD0 /CPUCS SFCLK48 GND(CORE) /CPUWR /CPURD /RESET VCC(CORE) PFCLK CLKSW GND(CORE) PFCLKOUT PFCLKIN GND(PLL) VCC(PLL) GND(PLL) VCC(PLL) TM2_15M /SYNC GND(AC) /VIDEO /LEND VCC(AC) OUTP00A OUTP01A OUTP02A OUTP03A OUTP04A OUTP05A OUTP06A OUTP15A VCC(CORE) OUTP07A OUTP08A GND(CORE) OUTP09A OUTP10A OUTP11A OUTP12A OUTP13A VCC(CORE) OUTP14A OUTP00B GND(AC) OUTP01B OUTP02B OUTP03B OUTP04B VCC(AC)
PFCLKOUT
TP719
R70
0J
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74
PFCLKIN D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 MEM_INT
TP720
R68
0J
VCC3 VCC3 A9 A8 A7 A6 R314 0J PFCLK CLKSW SYNC#
C75 22000P
RAM_CLK_OUT A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
SFCLK48
PFCLKOUT PFCLKIN

8 7 6 5
82JX4 TP228 TP229 TP231 TP233 TP235
BR49 1 2 3 4
TP866 TP867 TP868 TP869
PARAD0 8 PARAD1 7 PARAD2 6 PARAD3 5 BR40 33JX4 PARAD4 8 PARAD5 7 PARAD6 6 PARAD7 5 BR43 33JX4 33J /REV_O 8 /FAULT_O 7 /ACK_O 6 BUSY_O 5 PE_O BR47 33JX4 33J SLCT_O
(15) (15) (15) (15) (15) (15)
PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7
BR55 1 2 3 4
10KJX4 8 7 6 5
2
1 2 3 4
/SCANSP OP_CLK (1) (5) R56 10KJ R57 NM R58 NM PARAD0 PARAD1 PARAD2 PARAD3 TP232 TP234 TP236 TP237 OP_LATCH OP_DATA TM TM_ (5) (5) (5) (5) PFCLK TP743 VCC3
BR53 1 2 3 4
(4) (4)
DQM1 SDCKE
8 7 6 5 BR46 33JX4
VCC3
/INIT_I /SLCTIN_I /AUTOFD_I /STB_I
(15) (15) (15) (15) VCC3 VCC3
C351
MAD12 MAD11 MAD9 MAD8
TP822 TP823 TP824 TP825
RCV VPIN VMIN
8 7 6 5
33JX4
BR57 1 2 3 4
10KJX4 8 7 6 5
NM 33JX4 TP238 TP239 TP241
MAD7 MAD6 MAD5 MAD4
TP826 TP827 TP828 TP829
(4)
SDCLK
R59 33J
1 2 3 4 BR39 1 2 3 4 BR42 1 2 3 4 BR44 1 2 3 4 BR48 1 2 3 4 BR51 1 2 3 4 BR54 1 2 3 4 BR56 RAM_CLK_OUT 8 7 6 5
BR58 1 2 3 4 TP240 TP242 TP243 TP244 TP245 TP246 TP247 TP248 TP249 TP250 PARAD4 PARAD5 PARAD6 PARAD7 R60 NM HL PR CPFS2 (6) (6) (6) R61 10KJ R62 10KJ /INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB /IMC_READY KEYSC3 KEYSC2 KEYSC1 SPFON MIRON MPFS (9) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (6) BR59 1 2 3 4 BR60 1 2 3 4
10KJX4 8 7 6 5 10KJX4 8 7 6 5 10KJX4 8 7 6 5
C74 NM
223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 GND(CORE) MM_Y3 MM_Y2 MM_Y1 VCC(CORE) MM_PH_B MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 MM_PH_A MM_AI0 MM_AI1 MM_AI2 GND(AC) RAM_MAD3 RAM_MAD2 GND(CORE) RAM_MAD1 RAM_MAD0 RAM_MAD10 VCC(CORE) RAM_BANKS1 RAM_BANKS0 RAM_CS RAM_RAS RAM_CAS VCC(AC) RAM_WDE RAM_DQM0 GND(AC) RAM_DATA7 RAM_DATA6 RAM_DATA5 RAM_DATA4 GND(CORE) RAM_DATA3 RAM_DATA2 RAM_DATA1 RAM_DATA0 GND(AC) RAM_DATA15 RAM_DATA14 VCC(CORE) RAM_DATA13 RAM_DATA12 RAM_DATA11 RAM_DATA10 RAM_DATA9 RAM_DATA8 VCC(CORE) RAM_DQM1 RAM_CKE GND(AC) RAM_CLK_OUT GND(CORE) RAM_MAD12 RAM_MAD11 RAM_MAD9 VCC(CORE) RAM_MAD8 RAM_MAD7 VCC(AC) RAM_MAD6 RAM_MAD5 RAM_MAD4 GND(AC) CPUDATA15 CPUDATA14 CPUDATA13 CPUDATA12 CPUDATA11 CPUDATA10 CPUDATA9 CPUDATA8 /POREQ VCC(AC) /PIWT /PIACK GND(AC) /POACK /PIREQ GND(CORE) PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7 VCC(CORE) /TRANSST /RECEPTST /PRINTST /SCANST RCV VPIN VMIN GND(CORE) VPOUT VMOUT OEN GND(AC) SUSPEND IE1284_PARAD0 IE1284_PARAD1 VCC(AC) IE1284_PARAD2 IE1284_PARAD3 IE1284_PARAD4 IE1284_PARAD5 IE1284_PARAD6 IE1284_PARAD7 IE1284_REV VCC(CORE) IE1284_FAULT IE1284_ACK IE1284_BUSY IE1284_PE GND(CORE) IE1284_SLCT IE1284_INIT IE1284_SLCTIN VCC(CORE) IE1284_AUTOFD IE1284_STB TSP_MODE TSO0 /SCANSP VCC(AC) OPE_CLK GND(AC) OPE_LATCH OPE_DATA TM /TM VCC(CORE) OUTP14B OUTP13B OUTP12B OUTP11B OUTP10B OUTP09B OUTP08B GND(CORE) OUTP07B OUTP06B OUTP05B
148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75
VCC3
FB3 0J <1608> C76 0.1U
X2 TP251 8 TP252
X5 AT-49(18.3856MHz)
VCC
OUTPUT
SFCLK48A C77 NM_12P
R63 NM_33J SFCLK48
TP892
1
1 N.C. GND 4
NM_SG8002DC(48MHz) IC9 TP727 TP872 TP882 (1) /CSGASIC (1) /LWR (1,3,4,5) /RD RSV_OUT0 RSV_OUT1 RSV_OUT2 R75 NM TP254 TP257 R73 NM TP881 (3,5) (/ASIC_RST) R133 33J C97 FWREN (5) R79 0J C411 0.1U S0 S1 SFCLK48B R65 33J
C107
C108
10P
12P
SFCLK48A R92 NM S1 TP256
TP253
C402 SFCLK48B CY25814SC TP258 C375 X7 AT-49(12MHz)
12P
SYNC# TP746 (/SYNC) 10J TP747 C80 47P
R69
(5) (1) (1) (5)
MIRCNT CPU_SYNC ARB_INT
CPFS1 (6) MRPS3 (6) MRPS2 (6) MRPS1 (6) LDEN (6) RRS (6) PTPULSE (6) GASIC_READY (12) (1,5) (6) (6) (6) (6) (6) VIDEO# /LEND MMD PMD TC GRIDL TP255 TP259 TP260 TP261
7 6 4 3
VDD FRSEL S0 S1
XIN/CLKIN XOUT SSCLK VSS
1 8 5 2
12P
(1,3,4,13) D[15..0]
(1,3,4)
A[20..0]
(1)
/RES_GASIC
R134
NM
1000P
(6) MC (6) BIAS (6) VFMCNT_12V (6) VFM_24V (9) /FPOFF
MCU PWB (I/O ASIC section)
3/16
4
IO ASIC
3
(11) (11) (11) RSV_OUT17 RSV_OUT16 (RSV_SOL) PSFM (7) (6) IOIC3.3V 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U INFOLED PSL SPUS SRVC (11) (11) (7) (7) SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3
RSV_OUT15 RSV_OUT14 RSV_OUT13 RSV_OUT12 RSV_OUT11 RSV_OUT10 RSV_OUT9 RSV_OUT8
3
FB13 0J <1608> L15 NM_ZJSR5101-223TA VCC3
(11) TP271 TP272 TP273 TP274 TP636 TP275 TP276 TP277 TP278 TP279 TP306 TP280 TP281 IOIC3.3V
KEYIN
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
C568
C662
C575
C660
C574
C569
C663
(1) (1) (1,2,4,5) (1,4) /RD /HWR /CSIOASIC TP285 TP287
CPUCLK#
(1,2,4) A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 TP294 TP296 D15 D14 TP635
A[20..0]
GND YIN(PD50K)(5VFS) SELC(OD,5VFS) SELB(OD,5VFS) SELA(OD,5VFS) gnd XCE_EXT PORTG0(PD50K) PORTG1(PD50K) PORTG2(PD50K) PORTG3(PD50K) PORTG4(PD50K) PORTG5(PD50K) PORTG6(PD50K) PORTG7(PD50K) vdd PORTF0(PD50K) PORTF1(PD50K) PORTF2(PD50K) PORTF3(PD50K) PORTF4(PD50K) PORTF5(PD50K) PORTF6(PD50K) PORTF7(PD50K) GND
TP282
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76
IC52
LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 LCDE LCDRS /ES_CRDY MCNT
(5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (9) (6)
2
SC65892(IO ASIC) <LQFP100>
(2,5) (/ASIC_RST)
C98
TP811
C700
C304 10U/10V<2012>
GND D2(PU50K) D1(PU50K) D0(PU50K) PORTA7(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA6(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA5(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA4(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA3(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA2(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA1(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA0(PD50K)(5VFS) vdd PORTB7(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB6(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB5(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB4(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB3(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB2(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB1(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB0(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTC7(PD50K) PORTC6(PD50K) PORTC5(PD50K) GND
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
D10 D9 D8
TP314 TP315 TP316 TP317 TP318 TP319 TP320 TP321 TP322 TP323 TP324
NM_10KJ
R122
R263
(PPD1) (PPD2) (PPD3) (POD) (SPID) (CED1) (CED2) (DRST)
(8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8)
NM_10KJ

SFTMT0 SFTMT1 SFTMT2 SFTMT3 (7) (7) (7) (7) D13 D12 D11
(1) /RES_IOASIC
(1,2,4,13) D[15..0]
R135 33J R136 NM
1000P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 VDD PHICLK gnd XCE0(PU50K) CE1(PU50K) XOE(PU50K) XWR(PU50K) A4(PU50K) A3(PU50K) A2(PU50K) A1(PU50K) A0(PU50K) XRST(Sch) vdd D7(PU50K) D6(PU50K) SMC(SCAN)(PD50K) SIN(SCAN)(PD50K) SOUT(SCAN) AMC(SCAN)(PD50K) SCK(SCAN) D5(PU50K) D4(PU50K) D3(PU50K) VDD VDD PORTE0(PD50K) PORTE1(PD50K) PORTE2(PD50K) PORTE3(PD50K) PORTE4(PD50K) PORTE5(PD50K) PORTE6(PD50K) PORTE7(PD50K) gnd PORTD0(PD50K) PORTD1(PD50K) PORTD2(PD50K) PORTD3(PD50K) PORTD4(PD50K) PORTD5(PD50K) PORTD6(PD50K) PORTD7(PD50K) gnd PORTC0(PD50K) PORTC1(PD50K) PORTC2(PD50K) PORTC3(PD50K) PORTC4(PD50K) VDD
75 74 TP283 73 TP284 72 TP286 71 TP288 70 TP289 69 TP290 68 TP291 67 TP292 66 65 TP293 64 TP295 63 62 TP297 61 TP298 60 TP299 59 TP300 58 TP301 57 56 TP832 55 TP302 54 TP303 53 TP304 52 TP305 51
(PMRDY) (MMLD) (FANLK) THOPEN
(8) (8) (8) (6)
RSV_IN2
R706 NM_10KJ
VCC3 VCC3
R707 4.7KJ
R10 4.7KJ RSV_IN1 BL MSU_ST1 (11) (13) /ES_CRDY MSU_ST1
DSWS (TCS) DVS1 (PD1) (PD2) (SCOD) (SRJD) (MFD)
(8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8)
LCDE LCDRS
MCU PWB (Memory section)
4/16
FlashROM VPP Controll
4
VCC3
Serial EE-PROM
VCC3 J1,J2 (9) VPP
VCC3
VCC3
C82 0.1U R74 10KJ TP889 R77 NM NM
IC5
1 2 3
(1) SCL (1) SDA
R76
100J
8 7 6 5 E0 E1 E2 VSS
VCC WC SCL SDA
1 2 3 4
CAT24WC08LI
R80
RAMDB[15..0]
(2)
3
VCC3 VCC3 IC6 NM NM 10KJ VCC3 RAMDB0 RAMDB1 RAMDB2 R84 10KJ TP327 TP329 A17 RAMDB3 RAMDB4 RAMDB5 RAMDB6 RAMDB7 VCC3
(1,2,3)
A[20..0]
RAMDB15 RAMDB14 RAMDB13 RAMDB12 RAMDB11 RAMDB10 RAMDB9 RAMDB8
R81
R82
R83
IC7
IC8
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7

TP888 R86 TP349 NM TP332 TP334 TP336 TP338 TP340 TP342 TP343 TP345 D15 D7 D14 D6 D13 D5 D12 D4
6 7 10 11 22 23 26 27
D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A20 TP326 TP328 TP330 TP331 TP333 TP335 TP337 TP339 TP341
DQM0 /SDWDE /SDCAS /SDRAS /SDCS BANK0 BANK1
TP850 TP849 TP813 TP840 TP838 TP853 TP839
TP851 TP816 TP812 TP852
DQM1 SDCLK SDCKE
(2) (2) (2) R85
0J
VCC3 VCC3 (1) RY/BY
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 (1,3) /HWR (2,5,9,12) /RESET0 (9) VPP TP344 TP346 TP347 C84 0.1U 0.1U C85 TP348 TP350 TP352 TP354 TP356 TP358 TP360 TP362 /RD TP367 TP369 A1 D11 D3 D10 D2 D9 D1 D8 D0 (1,2,3,5) /CSFROM (1)
1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) MAD10 MAD0 MAD1 MAD2 MAD3
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16
VDD VDD
8 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
VCC DQ0 VCCQ DQ1 DQ2 VSSQ DQ3 DQ4 VCCQ DQ5 DQ6 VSSQ DQ7 VCC LDQM WE CAS RAS CS BA0 BA1 A10 A0 A1 A2 A3 VCC
VSS DQ15 VSSQ DQ14 DQ13 VCCQ DQ12 DQ11 VSSQ DQ10 DQ9 VCCQ DQ8 VSS NC UDQM CLK CLKE NC A11 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 VSS
SDRAM (16bit x 4bank)
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
MAD12 MAD11 MAD9 MAD8 MAD7 MAD6 MAD5 MAD4 C83 NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
A17 A1 S29AL016D70TFI020
22000P
C352
C353
R88
C86
C87
C354
(1,2,3,13) D[15..0]
C355

A19 A18 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 TP353 TP355 TP357 TP359 TP361 TP363 TP365 TP366 TP368
TP726
(1) /CSSRAM (1,2,3,5) /RD (1,3) /HWR
5 28 12
CS1 OE WE
GND GND
9 25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A19 NC WE RP VPP WP RY/BY A18 A17 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A16 BYTE GND DQ15 DQ7 DQ14 DQ6 DQ13 DQ5 DQ12 DQ4 VCC DQ11 DQ3 DQ10 DQ2 DQ9 DQ1 DQ8 DQ0 OE GND CE A0
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
IS63LV1024L-12J-TR
VCC3 C88 0.1U
C89 0.1U
C90 0.1U
C91 0.1U
C92 0.1U
C93 0.1U
C94 0.1U
C95 0.1U
MAD[12..0] (2)
MCU PWB (Driver section 1)

3.3V
IC13 (2) (2) (2) R89 NM TP814 /RESET1 (11) /SYNC TP376 (1) /RESET# IC11 (2,4,9,12) /RESET0 /RESET# R121 R101 (/ASIC_RST) 100J TP833 100J TP378 (16) /ASIC_RST R119 R120 (2,3) 1KJ 33J (9,10) /OP_RST OP_CLK OP_DATA OP_LATCH R96 R97 R98 (OP_CLK) (OP_DATA) (OP_LATCH) /FAX_RST /NIC_RST (11) (11) (11) (13) (15) 33J 33J 33J 5V VCC3 VCC3
5/16
3.3V 5V 3.3V
Reset Circuit
Vcc 1 A1 A2 GND
NC7WZ17
VCC3
VCC3
4
Y1 Y2 2 4 6
TP377 NM 74LCX244 0.1U C310 C311 NM 47P C105 C104 0.01U (14) mt_at_home C99 TP381
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4

5
R91 33J (/SYNC) mt_at_home# (2) (1)
20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 3
R27 100KJ
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND

C96 0.1U
IC3 (2,4,9,12)
VDD VOUT
TP383
/RESET0
C290
C16
GND
CT
TP786
1U<2012> 0.1U
BU4212F
C17
0.01U IC16 (2) VCC3 BR61 MIRCNT
C18 NM
3.3V
VCC3
3.3V
ASIC Reset
(16) 33JX4 C110 0.1U (11) FW
3.3V
VCC3 IC14 R93 10KJ
3.3V
R28
33J
(1)
RESETOUT1
TP386
/ASIC_RST
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4

TP384 TP385 TP387 TP388 TP389 TP390 TP391
20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 5 6 7 8
(SPFMT0) (SPFMT1) (SPFMT2) (SPFMT3) (7) (7) (7) (7)
4 3 2 1
(1) SPFMT0 (1) SPFMT1 (1) SPFMT2/MIRCNT (1) SPFMT3 (2) MIRON (2) SPFON 74LCX244
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND
Vcc 1 3
C376
5 A1 A2 Y1 Y2 GND 6 4 2
NC7WZ17 TP393 TP394 C103 0.1U R100 33J (FW) (1,9)
R29 10KJ
C26 47P
3
(1,2) VIDEO# TP718 /VIDEO (11) R109 100J TP396 TP397 TP398 (KEYSC1) (KEYSC2) (KEYSC3) (TM) (TM_) 0.1U (11) (11) (11) (7) (7)
OP Reset
IC20
3.3V 5V
5V
NM
R64
33J
(2,3) (/ASIC_RST)
TP395
/OP_RST
(9,10)
C79 47P
R345 1KJ
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) 33P
KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 TM TM_
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND

74VHCT244
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4
20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
C117
C114
R71 10KJ
R72 10KJ
5V VCC3 R223 NM_0J R224 0J
3.3V
IC26
(3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 0.1U
LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 LCDE LCDRS
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND

LCDDB4# LCDDB5# LCDDB6# LCDDB7# LCDE# LCDRS# (11) (11) (11) (11) (11) (11) 74LCX244 C115
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4

20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
VCC3
R226 NM_10KJ
C255 0.1U IC19 VSAMP# CCD_TG# CCD_RS# BSAMP# CCD_CP# CCD_PHI2# CCD_PHI1# TC74VHC244FT C127 0.1U ADCLK#
1
(2) (1,2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) VSAMP CCD_TG CCD_RS BSAMP CCD_CP CCD_PHI1 CCD_PHI2 ADCLK

VCC3 R110 IC23 (2) (2) (2) AFE_SDI AFE_SEN AFE_SCK R361 R370 R371 NM_100J 33J 33J 33J AFE_SDI# AFE_SEN# AFE_SCK# (PB_NOE) (PB_NAE0) (PB_NWE) (/RD) R373 R374 R375 R376 33J 33J 33J 33J AFE_SDI# AFE_SEN# AFE_SCK# (14) (14) (14) (9,10) PB_NOE (9,10) PB_NAE0 (9,10) PB_NWE (1,2,3,4) /RD
AFE_SDI# AFE_SEN# AFE_SCK# C129 NM C130 NM C131 NM
(PB_NOE) (PB_NAE0) (PB_NWE) VCC3 R237 10KJ (/RD)
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND

74LCX244 C128 0.1U
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4

20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
(PB_NOE) (PB_NAE0) (PB_NWE) (/RD)
(13) (13) (13) (13)
C306 NM C307 NM C308 NM C309 NM
(2)
FWREN
1 2
IC46
4
NM_TC7SH32FU
1
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
TP412 TP413 TP414 TP415 TP416 TP417 TP418 TP419 R332 R333 R336 R338 R344 R354 R355 R360 VSAMP# 33J CCD_TG# 33J CCD_RS# 33J 33J BSAMP# CCD_CP# 33J CCD_PHI1# 33J CCD_PHI2# 33J ADCLK# 33J VSAMP# CCD_TG# CCD_RS# BSAMP# CCD_CP# CCD_PHI1# CCD_PHI2# ADCLK# (14) (14) (14) (14) (14) (14) (14) (14) C116 NM C120 NM C121 NM C122 NM C123 NM C124 NM C125 NM C126 NM

24V 24V PR# IC25 R363 R300 470KJ R301 4.7KJ R303 10KJ 12V 12V VCC3 VCC3
6/16
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
R268
R269
R270
R271
10KJ
TP792 TP785 TP790 TP789 TP429 (2) TP431 1U<2012> PTPULSE /MC /BIAS /TC /GRIDL /MCNT 47KJ C312 + TP432 TP430 R298 1.5KF Q18 KRC102S (11) (11) (11) (11) (12)
BR63 1 2 3 4
3 TP424
TP433
TP425
R299 100J
3 2
-
IC17A KIA393F
(D) TP427 (G) (S) Q19 2SK3018
IC17B
4
4
R362 PSFMOUT R297 47KJ D36 1SS355 C367 2.2U<2012> 12V C379 0.1U (12) R302 10KJ 4.7KJ1/4W<3216> KID65001AF D51 1SS355
(2) (2) (2) (2) (3) (3)
MC BIAS TC GRIDL MCNT PSFM
R395 1.5KJ R396 1.5KJ
1.5KJX4 TP420 8 TP421 7 TP422 6 TP423 5 TP426 TP428 TP435
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B E
Q7 KTA1505S
5 6
KIA393F + -
10KJ
10KJ
R265
R266
PGND VCC3 12V 24V 5V D52 MTZ J22B 24V R413 NM_10KJ R108 TP438 D1 NM_47KJ TP444 Q2 NM_KTA1505S VFMOUT 24V R388 TP448 0603SFF150FM/32-2 Q12 2SB1132 D55 (12) CRH01 47KJ TP454 0603SFF150FM/32-2 Q17 CP17 12V C112 22000P RTH_IN PGND 47KJ CP16 1SS355 VCC3 D2 D4 (12) R106 10KF MA700 TP436 IC21 R102 1KF R103 1MF R104 7.5KF
PGND
VCC3
VCC3
R105 1KJ
R419 NM_10KJ
R418 NM_10KJ
TP781
3 2
R107 4.3KF
IC22A KIA393F + -
1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C COM
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
TP434
FTH
(2) (2) (2) (2) R379 R380 TP447 NM_4.7KJ1/4W<3216> /VFMCNT (12) NM_1.5KJ NM_1.5KJ TP437 TP439 TP440 TP441 TP442 TP445 TP446 TP443 /CPFS1 /CPFS2 /MPFS /RRS R112 (12) (12) (12) (12)
CPFS1 CPFS2 MPFS RRS
TP784
BR62 1 2 3 4
1.5KJX4 8 7 6 5
(2) VFM_24V (2) VFMCNT_12V
TP723 TP722
12V C111 0.1U/50V<1608>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B E
KID65001AF
1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C COM
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
PGND
VCC3
3
Q16
3
D57
TP449
R386 TP450
1 2
NM_KDS226
12V
D3
3
KDS226
1 2
B C
3
8
IC53A
2
TP451 RLS-73
4.7KJ1/4W<3216>
3 2
+ -
TP452
R113 300J TP453
R114 100J RTH (1)
KRC102S R389
KIA358F-EL/P 12V C118 0.1U/50V<1608>
C113 0.1U
3
D58 TP457 RLS-73 PGND INT5V CRH01
TP455
R387 TP456
E B C
D56 Q13 2SB1132
4.7KJ1/4W<3216>
VCC3
12V
VCC3
VCC3
KRC102S
R118 1.2KF
R124 4.7KJ
8
TP458
IC22B KIA393F
5 6
+ -
R414 NM_10KJ (12) 1SS355 TP459 R90 10KJ IC24 R296 10KJ Q3 KRA119S D5
THOPEN
(3)
Q14
/MMCLK
R123 10KF
C119 22000P
(1) MMCLK
2 1
2
TP800 TP795 TP793 TP794 TP802 TP803 TP804
R142 NM_10KJ
KRC102S
2
2 3
TP460
MM_Y1 MM_Y2 MM_Y3 PMD PMCLK LDEN /LEND Q4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3
SHOLD (11)
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G 2
1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
KID65503F KRC102S
HLOUT
(11)
(1)
LCDCONT 12KF R368 NM
TP469
TP797 TP799
TP464
MMref0 MMref1 MMref2 /PMD PMCLK_A /LDEN
(7) (7) (7) (11) (11) (11)
R264
R116 10KJ
KIA358F-EL/P R307 7.5KF EN5V
R308 NM
KRC102S
D61 1SS355
R378 0J
100J
100J

(2) (2) (2) (2) (1) (2) TP801 KID65503F R115 100J1/4W<3216> R316 NM TP461 /MMD MRPS_1 MRPS_2 MRPS_3 /POFF (12) (7) (7) (7) (11)
LCD Contrast Buffer

VCC3 D66
VCC3 EN5V D67
5V
MMD MRPS1 MRPS2 MRPS3 POFF HL FTH
VCC3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
IC27
1 2
NM_KDS226
3
KDS226
1 2
TP798
TP805 TP806 TP807
R117 10KJ
IC45A
R393 0J
R394 NM
TP553
(LCDCONT)
(11)
3 2
+ -
Q15
TP472
TP473
NM_2SB1197K TP476 C407 NM C305 0.1U R383 NM
C398 0.1U
INT24V 5V 12V VCC3
Analog Tonner Sensor Buffer

5V EN5V R129 NM IC45B D59
D45 1SS355 TP466
D60
Q20 KRA119S
1 2
NM_KDS226 IC53B
1 2
NM_KDS226
1
5
+
Q21
R339
R304
PR
TP474
PR#
3 TP467 3
/PR (11) /PR
TP475
7
-
TP470 KIA358F-EL/P
R366 0J (16) TCS_AN TP463
5 6
+ -
TP465 KIA358F-EL/P
R381 NM (TCS_AN) (1)
R382 10KJ
C371 NM
PGND
7/16
Scanner Motor Driver
4
24VSCMT 5V R143 IC31 0.68J 1W TP477 TP479 (1) TP480 TP482 TP484 TP485 (1) (1) DMT3 DMT2 DMT1 (1) DMT0
(12) (12) (12) (12)
OUT_AOUT_A+ OUT_B+ OUT_B-
4
Duplex Motor Driver
O1 O2 O3 O4 7 9 16 2
/DMT0 /DMT1 /DMT2 /DMT3 (12) (12) (12) (12) 24VDupMT
R144 TP478
0.68J 1W IC32 R145 1.5KJ TP481 MM_AI0 PGND MM_AI1 MM_PH_A TP487 PGND (2) (2) (2) C133 820P
R146 1.5KJ
TP483
PGND
C134 820P
3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC GND GND COM COM

TD62064AF
5V
(2) (2) (2)
MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_PH_B
17 18
1 8
D8
TP488 L6219DS R149 30KJ C136 820P
R147 1KJ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 OUT 1A OUT 2A SENSE 2 COMP 2 OUT 2B GND GND I02 I12 PHASE 2 VREF 2 RC 2 VS SENSE 1 COMP 1 OUT 1B I01 GND GND I11 PHASE 1 VREF 1 RC 1 VSS
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
MTZ J22B
C135 820P TP489 PGND PGND C138 0.1U 5V PGND
R148 30KJ
R150 2KJ
R151 1KJ
R152 510J
C137 0.1U
PGND
(6) (6) (6)
MMref0 MMref1 MMref2
PGND PGND
3
(3) SFTMT0 (3) 24VSPFMT IC34 24V CP1 0603SFF150FM/32-2 SPMT_0 SPMT_2 SPMT_1 SPMT_3 (11) CP3 0603SFF150FM/32-2 24VDupMT (11) C139 47U/35V + C140 0.1U/50V <1608> (11) CP2 0603SFF150FM/32-2 24VSPFMT PGND (11) 24VSCMT (3) (3) SFTMT1 SFTMT2 SFTMT3 TP491 TP492 TP494 TP496 TP497 TP499
Shifter Motor Driver

IC33
3
O1 O2 O3 O4 2 7 9 16
/SFTMT0 /SFTMT1 /SFTMT2 /SFTMT3 (12) (12) (12) (12) 24VSFTMT
SPF Motor Driver
(5) (5) (5) (5)
(SPFMT0) (SPFMT2) (SPFMT1) (SPFMT3)
8 7 11 12 IN A IN A/ IN B IN B/ REF Sync Sense A Sense B

STA7100M PGND CP5 0603SFF150FM/32-2 24VSPFSOL CP6 0603SFF150FM/32-2 24VSFTMT
Vs
13
3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18
I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC GND GND
COM COM
TD62064AF
1 8
D9
4 3 2 1
9 6 5 14 GND 10
MTZ J22B
BR66
10KJX4
OUT A OUT A OUT A/ OUT A/ OUT B OUT B OUT B/ OUT B/
1 2 3 4 17 18 15 16
5 6 7 8
5V R157 1J 2W R158 1J 2W
R159 1.2KJ
RSPF Solenoid Driver

PGND 24VSPFSOL D41 D42 D43 1SS355 1SS355 1SS355

TP501 (3) (RSV_SOL) R275
R160 300J
R161 620J
R162 1.2KJ
R163 100J
C141
0.1U
(6) (6) (6)
MRPS_1 MRPS_2 MRPS_3
PGND
PGND
PGND
TP504 NM_1.2KJ
/RSV_SOL Q25 NM_2SD1781K R406 NM_10KJ TP502 (3) SRVC 1.2KJ R407 10KJ TP503 R404 TP506 /SPUS R403 TP505 /SRVC Q24 2SD1781K
(11)
Tonner Motor Driver

24V
(11)
5V
R309 NM_0J <1608> R312 0J <1608> R164 4.7KJ C143
(11) + (3) SPUS 1.2KJ R408 10KJ Q23 2SD1781K
C142 10U/35V 0.1U/50V<1608>
IC36
2 Vcc IN1 IN2 GND N.C

TA7291AS
Vs Vref OUT1 OUT2 4 3 7 8
(5)
(TM)
9 1 5
(5)
(TM_)
TMA_O TMB_O
(12) (12)
1
PGND
C145 0.1U/50V<1608>
C144 NM_10U/10V<2012>
PGND
MCU PWB (Noise filter/Pull-up section)

VCC3 5V
8/16
VCC3
4
D10 D11 D12 D13
C146
C147
C148
C149
C150
C151
C152
C153
C154
4
3
R167 15KJ R168 15KJ R169 15KJ R170 4.7KJ R171 4.7KJ R172 4.7KJ R173 15KJ R174 4.7KJ
1 3 2
INT24V R175 (12) 24V1(DSWS) 0.22J 2W D14 1SS355 (12) (11) 5V POD PMRDY R179 1KJ 2W KDS226 KDS226 KDS226 KDS226
1 3 2 2 2 3
0.1U
NM
0.1U
0.1U
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
C155
C156
C157
C158
C159
C160
C161
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
0.1U
0.1U
C162
C163
C164
C165
C166
C167
C168
C169
C170
(11) (11) (11) (12) (12) (12)
SCOD SPID SRJD PPD3 PD1 PD2
R176 R177 R178 R180 R181 R182 R183 R184
1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ
(SCOD) (SPID) (SRJD) (PPD3) (PD1) (PD2) (POD) (PMRDY)
(3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
0.1U PGND PGND
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
NM
D15 C171 C172
D16
D17
D18
C173 1000P
C174 1000P
C175 1000P
C176 1000P
C177 1000P
C178 1000P
1 3
D19
1 3 2
KDS226 KDS226 KDS226 KDS226
1 3 2 2 3
1000P
1
1000P
2
5V D20
1SS355
1
TP508
3 2
KDS226
R185 20KJ
R186 20KJ
3
DSWS 5V R187 2.7KJ 0.1U D21 D22 D37 C179 (3)
VCC3
VCC3
1 3 2
KDS226 KDS226
1 3 2 2
1 3
R188 1KJ KDS226 R189 1KJ R190 15KJ R191 4.7KJ R340 4.7KJ R377 4.7KJ
R192 10J
R193 10J
R194 10J
R195 10J
R196 10J
R197 10J
TP509 TP515 TP516 TP517 TP518 (16) (16) (12) (12) (12) (12) VCC3 R202 0J D23 R203 0J R204 0J R205 0J D24 MFD MMLD FANLK PSFANLK DVSEL TCS R305 R306 100J 100J TP831 TP830
TP510
TP511
TP512
TP513
TP514
C180
C181
C182
C183
C184
C185
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P
R198 R199 R200 R201 R367 R372 C186 D54 C187 C188 C189 C372 C380
1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ
DVS1 (TCS) (MFD) (MMLD) (FANLK) (PSFANLK)
(3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (1)
1 3 2
KDS226
1 3 2
KDS226
1 3 2
KDS226
UDZS3.9B
D63
2
INT24V D25 1SS355 5V VCC3
D62
UDZS3.9B
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P

R206 100J 2W IC37 D26 D27 D28
24V D29
C190
C191
47U/35V
R125 100KJ 0.1U/50V<1608>
1 IN GND
C192 +
OUT
3
INT5V
1 3 2
1 3 2
KDS226 KDS226
1 3 2
KDS226 R207 15KJ R208 15KJ R209 4.7KJ R210 4.7KJ R211 4.7KJ
1 3 2
KDS226 R212 12KJ R213 3.3KJ
PGND 47U/35V 0.1U
2 KIA7805
C193
FB4 0J <1608> FB5 NM_0J <1608> L5 ZJSR5101-223TA (11) C195 + 22U/16V C197 0.1U 3.3VIN VCC3
(12) (12) (11) (11)
PPD1 PPD2 SPPD PSW
R214 R215 R216 R217
1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ
(PPD1) (PPD2) (SPPD) (PSW)
(3) (3) (1) (1)
L4 NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
(11)
12VIN
12V
C194
C196
(12) (12) (11)
CED1 CED2 DRST 5V VCC3
R218 R219 R220
1KJ 1KJ 1KJ
(CED1) (CED2) (DRST)
(3) (3) (3)
47U/25V
R126 100KJ 0.1U/50V<1608>
R128 100KJ
D30
D31
C198
C199
C200
C201
D32
C202
C203
1 3 2
KDS226
1 3 2
KDS226
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P
1 3 2
KDS226
1000P
1000P
5V EN5V C205 22U/16V + C207 0.1U R130 100KJ
C204
C206
R127 100KJ
22U/16V
0.1U
MCU PWB (IMC2 section 1/2)

IC38 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] IC39 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
9/16
(2)
/PIWR
(2)
PIDATA[7..0]
(2) (2)
/PIACK /PIREQ
4
VCC3 R346 10KJ SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] VCC3 R221 NM
PIDATA7 PIDATA6 PIDATA5 PIDATA4 PIDATA3 PIDATA2 PIDATA1 PIDATA0 SDRAM_BANK[1:0]
TP519 TP521 TP523 TP525 TP527 TP529 TP531 TP533 TP535 TP537 TP539 TP541 TP543 TP545 TP547 TP549 TP551
119 120 124 125 126 127 128 129 131 132 133 134 135 137 138 141 142 PI_LINE_SYNC/GP_D6 PI_TR_TGEN PI_TGEN6 PI_TGEN5 PI_TGEN4 PI_TGEN3 PI_TGEN2 PI_TGEN1 PI_TGEN0 PI_DATA7 PI_DATA6 PI_DATA5 PI_DATA4 PI_DATA3 PI_DATA2 PI_DATA1 PI_DATA0 109 107 106 105
_SDRAM_DATA[15:0] _SDRAM_DQMB0 _SDRAM_DQMB1 _SDRAM_DATA8 TP808 _SDRAM_DQMA1 _SDRAM_DQMA0 ROM_CS_L TP561 TP563 R225 R227 R228 R229 VCC3 SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] RY_BY TP728 33J 33J 33J SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L 33J ROM_CS_L R222 R390 33J 33J _SDRAM_CS0_L _SDRAM_CS1A_L
SDRAM_DATA0 SDRAM_DATA1 SDRAM_DATA2 SDRAM_DATA3 SDRAM_DATA4 SDRAM_DATA5 SDRAM_DATA6 SDRAM_DATA7 SDRAM_DATA8 SDRAM_DATA9 SDRAM_DATA10 SDRAM_DATA11 SDRAM_DATA12 SDRAM_DATA13 SDRAM_DATA14 SDRAM_DATA15
74 73 72 68 67 66 65 63 62 61 60 58 57 56 55 53
SDRAM_DATA0 SDRAM_DATA1 SDRAM_DATA2 SDRAM_DATA3 SDRAM_DATA4 SDRAM_DATA5 SDRAM_DATA6 SDRAM_DATA7 SDRAM_DATA8 SDRAM_DATA9 SDRAM_DATA10 SDRAM_DATA11 SDRAM_DATA12 SDRAM_DATA13 SDRAM_DATA14 SDRAM_DATA15 TP520 TP522 TP524 TP526 TP528 TP530 TP532 TP534 TP536 TP538 TP540 TP542 TP544 TP546 TP548 TP550
1 BR67 2 3 4 1 BR68 2 3 4 1 BR69 2 3 4 1 BR70 2 3 4
8 100JX4 7 6 5 8 100JX4 7 6 5 8 100JX4 7 6 5 8 100JX4 7 6 5
_SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA10 _SDRAM_DATA11 _SDRAM_DATA12 _SDRAM_DATA13 _SDRAM_DATA14 _SDRAM_DATA15
VCC3 RY_BY
(12) (12)
OA_RX OA_TX
R351
10KJ
RY_BY
SDRAM_DQMA0 SDRAM_DQMB0 SDRAM_DQMA1 SDRAM_DQMB1
SDRAM_DQMA0 SDRAM_DQMB0 SDRAM_DQMA1 SDRAM_DQMB1 TP552 TP554 TP556 TP558
1 BR71 2 3 4
8 33JX4 7 6 5
_SDRAM_DQMA0 _SDRAM_DQMB0 _SDRAM_DQMA1 _SDRAM_DQMB1 TP730 TP731 TP732 TP733
SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L
IO0 IO1 IO2 IO3 IO4 IO5 IO6 IO7 IO8 IO9 IO10 IO11 IO12 IO13 IO14 IO15/A-1
29 31 33 35 38 40 42 44 30 32 34 36 39 41 43 45
_SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 TP809 TP810 TP901 TP902 TP909 TP910 TP911 SDRAM_ADDR0
SDRAM_CS0_L SDRAM_CS1A_L SDRAM_CS1B_L ROM_CS_L VCCW 13 111 110 101 11 28 26 WE OE CE RY/BY BYTE WP/ACC RESET GND GND 46 27 15
33JX4 NM 10KJ TP570 TP572 TP574
104 102 77 75
SDRAM_CS0_L SDRAM_CS1A_L TP565 TP567
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 48 17 16 9 10 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20
VCC3
VPP
(4)
SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L
VCC
37
C209 0.1U
C208 NM
TP557 TP559 TP560 TP562 TP564 TP566 TP568 TP569 TP571 TP573 TP575 TP576 TP578 TP580 TP582 TP584 TP586 33JX4 TP744 TP745
143 145 146 147 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 159 160 161 162 163 165 166 167 PP_HIDRIVE/USART1_RX PP_DRIVE/USART1_TX PP_NINIT PP_NFAULT PP_NSELECTIN PP_NAUTOFD PP_SELECT PP_PERROR PP_BUSY PP_NACK PP_DATA7 PP_DATA6 PP_DATA5 PP_DATA4 PP_DATA3 PP_DATA2 PP_DATA1/USART1_CK PP_DATA0 PP_NSTROBE 47 14 12
R230
168 169 170 BASE_CLK/GP_PWM1 CLK_EXT/GP_PWM2 MAIN_CLK/GP_PWM0

33JX4 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 33J TP610 R233 C210 R235 R236 33J 4.7KJ _SDRAM_CLK _SDRAM_CLK _SDRAM_CKE 22000P SDRAM_BANK[1:0] NM (2,4,5,12) /RESET0 R232 NM R231 33JX4
CLK_EXT
TP589 TP591 TP593
8M/16M Flash ROM
(10,13) PB_DATA[7:0]
(13)
PB_NCS1
SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 SDRAM_CLK SDRAM_CKE
OA3.3V
100 99 97 96 95 94 92 91 90 89 85 82 80 84 83 79 78
TP608 R234 SDRAM_CKE
3
PLLCS_VDDA
C212 0.01U C213 1U<2012>
PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0
TP577 BR72 TP579 TP581 TP583 TP585 BR73 TP587 TP588 TP590 TP592 BR74 TP594 TP595 TP597 TP599 BR75 TP601 TP603 TP605
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12
BR76 1 33JX4 2 3 4 BR77 1 2 3 4 33JX4
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 7
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] C211 NM
(10) (5,10)
PB_NCS3 PB_NAE0
(10,13) PB_ADDR[7:0]
(5,10) (5,10)
PB_NWE PB_NOE
178 180 181 182 183 185 186 187 188 189 190 194 195 196 197 198 REG_A9/PB_NCS1 REG_A8/PB_NCS2 REG_AD7/PB_DATA7 REG_AD6/PB_DATA6 REG_AD5/PB_DATA5 REG_AD4/PB_DATA4 REG_AD3/PB_DATA3 REG_AD2/PB_DATA2 REG_AD1/PB_DATA1 REG_AD0/PB_DATA0 REG_ADDR_VALID/PB_NCS0 REG_RD_L/PB_NCS3 REG_WR_L/PB_NAE0 REG_CS_L/PB_NAE1 REG_RDY/PB_NWE INTERRUPT_L/PB_NOE PLLCS_VSSA 6 199 201 202 203 204 205 207 208 GP_C0/PB_ADDR0 GP_C1/PB_ADDR1 GP_C2/PB_ADDR2 GP_C3/PB_ADDR3 GP_C4/PB_ADDR4 GP_C5/PB_ADDR5 GP_C6/PB_ADDR6 GP_C7/PB_ADDR7 PLLSS_VDDA
C214 0.01U C215 1U<2012> SDRAM_BANK[1:0]
IC40 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
PB_ADDR0 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR7
BR78 1 33JX4 2 3 4 BR79 1 2 3 4 33JX4
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 149
(1) (1) TP629 TP631 TP632 TP633 TP634 OA3.3V
ES_CMD ES_STS
(1,5) (10) (10)
(FW) DT_ACKB DT_REQB
(13)
MODEM_IN
1 2 8 9 11 12 13 14 GP_B0/USART0_TX GP_B1/USART0_RX GP_B2/USART0_CK GP_B3/ANA_SD1 GP_B4/DT_ACKB GP_B5/DT_REQB GP_B6/DT_ACKA GP_B7/DT_REQA PLLSS_VSSA 148
SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1
TP764 TP765 TP766 TP767 TP768 TP769 TP770 TP771 TP772 TP773 TP774 TP775 TP776 TP777 TP778
23 24 25 26 29 30 31 32 33 34 22 35 36 20 21
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 BA0 BA1
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9 DQ10 DQ11 DQ12 DQ13 DQ14 DQ15
TP788 TP787 TP780 TP779 _SDRAM_CLK _SDRAM_CLK TP796 _SDRAM_CS0_L SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L TP791 _SDRAM_CKE
2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 19 16 17 18 38 37 CS WE CAS RAS CLK CKE
_SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA10 _SDRAM_DATA11 _SDRAM_DATA12 _SDRAM_DATA13 _SDRAM_DATA14 _SDRAM_DATA15 VCC3
(1) (3) (1) (10) TP638 TP639 TP640
/ES_PAGE /ES_CRDY /ES_SRDY WAKEUP
(12) OA982_READY
15 16 19 21 22 23 GP_D0/ADC_A0 GP_D1/ADC_A1 GP_D2/ADC_A2 GP_D3/ADC_CLK GP_D4/ADC_DATA GP_D5/ADC_NCS

OA3.3V
VCC3 FB6 0J <1608>
VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ

_SDRAM_DQMA0 _SDRAM_DQMA1
49 43 9 3 15 39 LDQM UDQM
C239 NM L6 NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
VCC3
(2) /IMC_READY (13) MDM_IRQ (10) SUSPEND(USB2.0) C397 10U/10V<2012> C396 10U/10V<2012> C395 10U/10V<2012>
VDD VDD VDD
27 14 1
C235 0.1U
C236 0.1U
C237 0.1U
C238 0.1U
C217 10U/10V<2012>
2
OA3.3V C218 0.1U C219 0.1U C220 0.1U C221 0.1U C222 0.1U C223 0.1U C224 0.1U
R238
C216 NM
10KJ
(2) (10) (2) (2) /FPOFF
/SC_LINE INT_USBD /PR_LINE /FPOFF
TP642 TP643 TP644 TP645 TP646 TP647 TP648
24 26 28 29 30 31 32 34 GP_A0 GP_A1 GP_A2/DC_CHY1 GP_A3/DC_CHX1 GP_A4/DC_PWM1 GP_A5/DC_CHY0 GP_A6/DC_CHX0 GP_A7/DC_PWM0
(2)
/H_SYNC
VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO
C225 0.1U C226 0.1U
3 20 25 33 46 59 71 81 93 103 115 130 144 158 171 184 200
VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ

TP912
52 46 12 6
C248 0.1U
C249 0.1U
C250 0.1U
2
40 N.C VSS VSS VSS
HY57V561620FTP-H-C
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
C366
C362
C381
C382
C383
C384
C385
C386

33JX4
(2) (2)
/POREQ /POACK
54 41 28
/FPOFF
R239
10KJ
VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE

C227 0.1U C228 0.1U C229 0.1U C230 0.1U C231 0.1U C232 0.1U
18 36 70 88 122 140 174 192
PODATA7 PODATA6 PODATA5 PODATA4 PODATA3 PODATA2 PODATA1 PODATA0
1 2 3 4 BR80 1 2 3 4 BR81
33JX4 TP663 TP664
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 175 176 USB_DM USB_DP

C240 0.1U C241 0.1U C242 0.1U
TP650 TP651 TP652 TP653 TP654 TP655 TP656 TP657 TP658 TP659 TP660 TP661 TP662 C233 0.1U
37 38 39 40 42 43 44 45 47 48 49 50 51 52 PO_LINE_SYNC/ANA_SCLK PO_PAGE_SYNC/ANA_NCS PO_REQ/ANA_SD0 PO_ACK/PDATA0/PDS0 PO_DONE/PDATA2/PDS2 PO_WR/PDATA1/PDS1 PO_DATA7/LHEAT/PAS_M PO_DATA6/LCTRL/CFIRE2 PO_DATA5/AGATE/CFIRE1 PO_DATA4/ACLK/MFIRE2 PO_DATA3/PENABLE/MFIRE1 PO_DATA2/PLOAD PO_DATA1/PCLK PO_DATA0/PDATA3/PAS_C
C234 0.1U
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
IC44 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
(2) PODATA[7..0]
C243 0.1U
C244 0.1U
C245 0.1U
C246 0.1U
C247 0.1U
(5,10) /OP_RST TDO TCK TMS TDI TP666 TP667 TP668
TP665
(1) /RES_OA982
R137 33J R138 NM
C100 1000P (12)
TRST_L
(2,4,5,12) /RESET0
R343
NM_0J
TDO TCK TMS TDI
112 113 114 116 117 118 RESET_L TDO TCK TMS TDI TRST_L TEST_MODE0 TEST_MODE1 172 177
SDRAM_BANK[1:0] VCC3 10KJX4
R342
4.7KJ
(12) (12) (12) (12) TRST_L VCC3 R245 R246
NM NM
VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO
10 27 41 54 64 76 86 98 108 123 136 150 164 179 193 206
SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 TP925
23 24 25 26 29 30 31 32 33 34 22 35 36 20 21
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 BA0 BA1

_SDRAM_CS1A_L SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L 10KJX4 _SDRAM_CLK _SDRAM_CLK TP926 _SDRAM_CKE 10KJX4 _SDRAM_DQMA0 _SDRAM_DQMA1
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9 DQ10 DQ11 DQ12 DQ13 DQ14 DQ15 19 16 17 18 38 37 15 39 CS WE CAS RAS CLK CKE LDQM UDQM
2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53
_SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA10 _SDRAM_DATA11 _SDRAM_DATA12 _SDRAM_DATA13 _SDRAM_DATA14 _SDRAM_DATA15 VCC3
R247 R248
4.7KJ 4.7KJ
VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ VDD VDD VDD

10KJX4 C265 NM
49 43 9 3 27 14 1 52 46 12 6 VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ

_SDRAM_CS1A_L C303 NM TP930
VCC3
VCC3
1
XIN XOUT
OA-982 XOUT TP669
R240 R241 R242 R243 R244
10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ NM_10KJ
TDO TCK TMS TDI TRST_L
C252 33P
5 4
VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE
17 35 69 87 121 139 173 191
X4 AT-49(18.3856MHz) R249 0J
XIN
C254 33P CLK_EXT R250 4.7KJ
R369 NM
_SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA10 _SDRAM_DATA11 _SDRAM_DATA12 _SDRAM_DATA13 _SDRAM_DATA14 _SDRAM_DATA15
BR82 1 2 3 4 BR83 1 2 3 4 BR84 1 2 3 4 BR85 1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
C300 0.1U
C299 0.1U
C302 0.1U
C301 0.1U
C256 0.1U
C263 0.1U
C264 0.1U
CLK_EXT
40
_SDRAM_CS0_L _SDRAM_CKE C251 NM C253 47P
N.C
VSS VSS VSS

HY57V561620FTP-H-C
54 41 28
MCU PWB (IMC2 USB2.0 section 2/2)

ISP33 0J <1608> C257 0.01U C258 0.01U C259 0.01U C260 0.01U
10/16
VCC3 L11 C271 0.1U
C270 0.1U
GND
FG
ISP33
GND
C266 0.1U C267 0.1U C268 0.1U C269 0.1U
GND
ISP33 C273 18P C272 15P X6 C261 10U/10V<2012> C262 0.1U 0J <1608> TP670 L13
VCC3
AT-49(12MHz)
TP907 C403 VCC3 R253 1.2KJ TP871 TP677 R257 10KJ VCC3 R262 1.5KJ C274 0.01U L8 TP704 TP706 TP705 TP709 (5,9) /OP_RST R272 L9 VCC3 10KJ 10KJ BLM21PG600SN1 (9) TP707 R274 0J INT_USBD R258 R259 10KJ NM 12KF NM C101 1000P TP683 TP685 PB_NOE PB_NWE (1) /RES_USB20 R273 (9) (9) DT_REQB DT_ACKB TP702 DLW21SN900SQ2 R255 10KJ IC41 VCC3 R260 10KJ R261 10KJ (9) WAKEUP (9) SUSPEND(USB2.0) TP783
0.1U
3
C405 C404 1U<2012> VCC3 R254 NM R111 1MF
100KJ
0.1U
R399
C406 10U/10V<2012> PB_ADDR7 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR3 TP700 TP699 TP698 TP697 TP696 PB_ADDR[7:0] (9,13)
TP880
R267 NM_<1608>
L7
CN1 UBR23-4K2200
SUSPEND WAKEUP BUS_CONF/DA0 VCC(3V3) MODE0/DA1 DGND XTAL1 XTAL2 VCC1V8 VBUS VCC(I/O) DATA15 DATA14 DATA13 DATA12 DATA11
BLM21PG600SN1
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
FG
SHIELD GND +D -D +5V
5 4 3 2 1
PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR0 PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 ISP1583BS PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0 TP675 TP701 R256 10KJ
TP695 TP694 TP693 TP692 TP691 TP690 TP689
PB_DATA[7:0] (9,13)
USB2.0 DEV1
R139 33J R310 NM
DA2 CS_N RW_N/RD_N DS_N/WR_N CS0_N CS1_N AD0 AD1 AD2 VCC(I/O) AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7 VCC1V8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AGND RPU DP DM AGND RREF RESET_N EOT DREQ DACK DIOR DIOW DGND INTRQ READY/IORDY INT
DATA10 DATA9 DATA8 DATA7 DATA6 DATA5 DATA4 VCC(I/O) DATA3 DATA2 DATA1 DATA0 ALE/A0 DGND MODE1 N.C. DGND
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
TP688 TP687 TP686 TP684
R251
R252
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
10KJ
10KJ
R401
R400
5
PB_NCS3 TP908
(5,9) TC7SH08FU TP708 C408 0.1U
PB_NAE0
IC183
(9)
5 1 2 3 4
TP703
(5,9) (5,9)
PB_NOE PB_NWE
PB_NOE PB_NWE
C410 0.1U
TC7SH126FU
VCC3
(9,13) PB_DATA[7:0] IC43
5 2
C409 0.1U TC7SH04FU
(9)
DT_ACKB
4 1
PB_DATA0 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA7
C370
VCC3 IC42
VCC3
TP682
0.1U

VCC3 TP870 TP681 TP782
DIE
MCU PWB (Connector section 1)

To Power unit To Operational PWB
INT5V EN5V VCC3 5V INT24V
11/16
4
4
CN2
0603SFF150FM/32-2 CP8
EN5V 5V 24V HLOUT (6) D33 /POFF 24V (6)
(8) (5) (6)
EN5V 5V 12VIN FW /PR
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
3.3VIN 5V (8) CP10 /TC /MC (6) (6)
0603SFF150FM/32-2
(6) (6)
/BIAS /GRIDL
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 1 3 2
R347 KDS226 (SELIN1) (SELIN2) (SELIN3) NM_<1608> R276 10KJ
C275
C276
B24B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)
0.1U/50V<1608> NM_<1608> PGND PGND C277 1000P (6) (LCDCONT) R353 0J PGND (5) (5) (5) (1) (KEYSC3) (KEYSC2) (KEYSC1) BZR (3) KEYIN R277 1KJ
(White)
(3)
PSL
R350
0J
(8) (8) (5) (5)
(LCDRS) (LCDE) (LCDDB4) (LCDDB5) (LCDDB6) (LCDDB7) DRST PSW (OP_DATA) (OP_CLK) (5) (OP_LATCH)
3
(3) (3) INFOLED BL R352 R331 NM NM
0603SFF150FM/32-2 CP9
CN3
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FF4-32-S15D5 NM 1000P NM R365 100J 0J 0J 1000P 1000P R385 R398 NM
C364
C278
C279
5V
5V 24VSPFSOL
5V
R278
R140
200J1/4W<3216>
CN29 R141
200J1/4W<3216>
200J1/4W<3216>
(8) (8) (8) (7) (7) (7) SCOD /RSV_SOL /SPUS /SRVC
(7) (7) (7) (7) (8) 24VSPFMT (8) (7) (7) (7) (7) SPID SPMT_3 SPMT_1 SPMT_2 SPMT_0
SPMT_0 SPMT_2 SPMT_1 SPMT_3 SPID
SPPD
200J1/4W<3216>
CN30
R349
24VSPFMT
SRJD
(8)
SPPD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
B12B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) B24B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
(5)
LCDDB7#
R295
100J C358 100P
C363
(LCDDB7)
(3)
SELIN1
R330
100J C361 100P
C280
To SPF unit
5V
To RSPF unit
C365
(SELIN1)
(5)
LCDDB6#
R294
100J C357 100P
(LCDDB6)
(3)
SELIN2
R329
100J C360 100P

(5) LCDDB5# R293 100J C356 100P (5) LCDDB4# R292 100J C349 100P
(SELIN2)
(LCDDB5)
(3)
SELIN3
R328
100J C359 100P
(SELIN3)
(LCDDB4)
To LSU
(5) 5V INT5V
LCDE#
R291
0J C347 100P
(LCDE)
D65
1
24V CN41
3 2
(5)
LCDRS#
R290
100J C317
(LCDRS)
1
CN42 (6) (8) (6) /PMD PMRDY PMCLK_A
KDS226
1 2 3 4 5
To Polygon motor
B05B-CZHK-B(LF)(SN)(V)
100P
(5)
/SYNC
R282 PGND
1KJ
To LD
(6) (5) (6)
/LDEN /VIDEO SHOLD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B08B-CZHK-B(LF)(SN)(V)
MCU PWB (Connector section 2)

5V 24V R283 200J1/4W<3216> 1/4W
12/16
Not mounted To HL unit CPU Serial
VCC3 CN13 (1) (1) RxD TxD
INT24V
4
CN11 (8) B2P-VH-R(LF)(SN) (6) RTH_IN 24V1(DSWS)
CP21 CN10
(For debug)
4
0J <1608>
CN12
To Main motor
(Red)
B5B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) 0.1U/50V<1608> 0.1U/50V<1608>
1 2
To Interlock switch
(8) PPD2
(6) (8) (6)
/MMD MMLD /MMCLK
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
C281
C282
1000P C283 C284
1000P
B5B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)
(White)
(White)
1 2 3 4
B4B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
PGND 5V PGND R284 200J1/4W<3216> CN14 24V (6) CN15 (6) B5B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN) /CPFS1 (8) MFD /MPFS 24V
(White)
CN16
1 2 3 4 5
To Multi unit
OA982 JTAG & Serial

VCC3 CN17
(6) (8) (6) B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
VFMOUT FANLK /VFMCNT
1 2 3 4
To VF Fan motor
(Red) (White)
1 2 3
To Cassette paper solenoid
B4B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
1 3 5 7 9
(9) TRST_L (9) TMS (9) TDO (9) TDI (9) TCK (2,4,5,9) /RESET0 (9) OA_TX (9) OA_RX
2 4 6 8 10
TCK /RESET0 OA_TX OA_RX
C285
C286
1000P
1000P
(White)
3
24V 24V 5V CN18 (6) (6) (8) (8) (8) 1000P 1000P 1000P PD2 CED2 PPD3 /CPFS2 /RRS
To 2nd. cassette
TCK /RESET0 B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) OA_TX OA_RX
PGND
1 2 3
24VDupMT B3B-PH-K-E(LF)(SN)
To Resist roller solenoid

CN19 NM
CN20
(Blue)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13
B14B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
(White)
C287 C288 C289
C373
C374
B05B-XASK-1(LF)(SN)
NM_<1608>
(7) (7) (7) (7)
/DMT0 /DMT1 /DMT2 /DMT3
1 2 3 4 5
To Duplex motor
To PS Fan motor
CN35 PGND (6) (8) PSFMOUT PSFANLK
CN21 (8) CED1
PGND
3 2 1
NM_B03B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)
1 2 3
To Cassette detect
24V CN23
C368 1000P
(White)
CN22
B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)
(Black)
5V R285 200J1/4W<3216> CN24 (8) PPD1 (6) /MCNT
(7) (7) (7) (7)
OUT_A+ OUT_B+ OUT_AOUT_B-
1 2 3 4
To Mirror motor
PGND
B4B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN)
3 2 1
NM_B3B-PH-K-R
To Mecha. COUNTER
(Red)
NM
R288
CN27 D38 CN28 (8) PD1
R287
24VSFTMT
390J
(White)
TP710 TP712 D39 D40
R289
B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
NM TP711

1 2 3
(Red)
To Paper pass detect
B3B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN)
(Red)
CN25 5V R286 200J1/4W<3216> CN26 (8) POD
(7) (7)
TMA_O TMB_O
1 2
To Toner motor
LED for Checker
B2P-VH(LF)(SN)
(White)
1 2 3
VCC3 VCC3 VCC3
To Paper out detect
(7) (7) (7) (7)
/SFTMT0 /SFTMT1 /SFTMT2 /SFTMT3
1 2 3 4 5
To Shifter motor
1
1 2 3
B5B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
To Paper detect
B3B-PH-K-M(LF)(SN)
NM_LT1P67A Q9 NM_KRC106S 3 LT1P67A (2) GASIC_READY
TP713
NM_LT1P67A Q10 NM_KRC106S 3
TP714
(9) OA982_READY
(White)
(Green)
MCU PWB (Modem I/F Connector)

(9,10) PB_DATA[7:0]
13/16
4
To Modem PWB
(9,10) PB_ADDR[7:0]
BR91 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 #PB_DATA7 #PB_DATA6 #PB_DATA5 #PB_DATA4 #PB_DATA3 #PB_DATA2 #PB_DATA1 #PB_DATA0 24V VCC3 EN5V BR90 33JX4
33JX4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
(5) C102 0.1U (1) /RES_FAX CP11 BR92 CP13 (9) PB_NCS1 (5) (PB_NAE0) (5) (PB_NWE) (5) (PB_NOE) R311 1KJ VCC3 D46 L16 0J <1608> TP903 CN5 33JX4
0603SFF150FM/32-2
0603SFF150FM/32-2
(9)
MDM_IRQ
(MDM_IRQ)
PB_NCS1 (PB_NAE0) (PB_NWE) (PB_NOE) (/FAX_RST) #MDM_IRQ
CP12 L14 0J <1608> PGND
1 2
KDS226
0603SFF150FM/32-2 TP904
/FAX_RST
R313 100J R325 NM
PB_ADDR7 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR0
PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0 BR93 33JX4 5 4 6 3 7 2 8 1 5 4 6 3 7 2 8 1 #PB_ADDR7 #PB_ADDR6 #PB_ADDR5 #PB_ADDR4 #PB_ADDR3 #PB_ADDR2 #PB_ADDR1 #PB_ADDR0
(/FAX_RST) (PB_NWE) PB_NCS1 #PB_ADDR1 #PB_ADDR3 #PB_ADDR5 #PB_ADDR7 #PB_DATA1 #PB_DATA3 #PB_DATA5 #PB_DATA7 MCU_nCS MCU_D0 MCU_D2 MCU_D4 MCU_D6 MODEM_IN B40B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)
39 37 35 33 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
40 38 36 34 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
#MDM_IRQ (PB_NOE) (PB_NAE0) #PB_ADDR0 #PB_ADDR2 #PB_ADDR4 #PB_ADDR6 #PB_DATA0 #PB_DATA2 #PB_DATA4 #PB_DATA6 MCU_INT (/RD) MCU_D1 MCU_D3 MCU_D5 MCU_D7
(1,2,3,4)
D[15..0]
VCC3
R315 10KJ
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 BR88 33JX4
BR89 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
33JX4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
(1) (3) C378 NM D47 1KJ VCC3 MSU_ST1 R317
/CS5
TP725
R391
(9) MODEM_IN (5) (/RD)
100J
MCU_D7 MCU_D6 MCU_D5 MCU_D4 MCU_D3 MCU_D2 MCU_D1 MCU_D0 MODEM_IN (/RD) MCU_nCS MCU_INT
1 2
KDS226
C323 NM
C324 NM
C328 NM
C335 NM
C336 NM
C337 NM
C330 10KJ
C321 10KJ
C333 10KJ
C327 10KJ
C334 NM
C331 NM
C329 NM
C320 10KJ
C332 10KJ
C326 10KJ
C322 10KJ
C325 NM

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 MSU_ST1 PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0 (MDM_IRQ)
MCU PWB (Scanner I/F section)
14/16
4
Copy Lamp Inverter

L12 220UH VCL VCC3 TWKA-221K
To Scanner unit
12V EN5V
24V
CP18 0603SFF150FM/32-2
Q5 2SJ537
CP14 0603SFF150FM/32-2
CP15 0603SFF150FM/32-2 TP886 L17 1J <1608>
3
3
D48 + C339 C340 R322 12KJ
R318 910J
3
CN4 AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#2 AFE_DB#4 AFE_DB#6 AFE_DB#1 AFE_DB#3 AFE_DB#5 AFE_DB#7 AFE_SEN# AFE_SDI# BSAMP# VSAMP# VCL VCL (5) (5) (5) (5)
1 2
KDS226
C341 (5) C342 1000P mt_at_home
(2)
CL
R323 15KJ
R324 56KJ
Q6 KTC3198
5.6KJ1/4W<3216>
33P
R321
C338 47U/35V 47U/35V R320 1KJ
D49 11EQS06
R319 15KJ 0.1U/50V<1608>
(5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5)
AFE_SCK# ADCLK# CCD_PHI1# CCD_PHI2# CCD_CP# CCD_RS# CCD_TG#
32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
FF4-32-S15D5
PGND
PGND
PGND
2
(2) AFE_DB[7..0] AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7 BR86 33JX4 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 BR87 33JX4 AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#1 AFE_DB#2 AFE_DB#3 AFE_DB#4 AFE_DB#5 AFE_DB#6 AFE_DB#7

B C D
AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7
C109C318C132C314C313C319C315C316 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P
MCU PWB (NIC I/F section)
15/16
4
VCC3
EN5V
CP19
0603SFF150FM/32-2
CP20 TP906 L19 0J <1608>
TP905 L18 0J <1608>
0603SFF150FM/32-2
3
CN39
To NIC PWB
C106
(1) /RES_NIC
R326 1KJ R327 NM PARAD0 PARAD1 PARAD2 PARAD3 PARAD4 PARAD5 PARAD6 PARAD7 TP672 TP673 TP674 TP676 TP678 TP679 TP680 TP717
0.1U
(5)
/NIC_RST
8 7 6 5 8 BR94 33JX4 7 6 5 BR95 33JX4
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
(2) C388 C387 C389 C391 C390 C392 C393 C394
PARAD[7..0]
12P
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
/ACK_O BUSY_O PE_O SLCT_O /FAULT_O /STB_I /AUTOFD_I /SLCTIN_I /INIT_I /REV_O
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 /ACK_O BUSY_O PE_O SLCT_O /FAULT_O /STB_I /AUTOFD_I /SLCTIN_I /INIT_I /REV_O R402
VCC3
EN5V
NM
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
24FMN-BTK-A
C345 0.1U
C346 0.1U
C343 0.1U
C344 0.1U

B C
MCU PWB (CRUM I/F section)

24V TP721 (6) EN5V NM_B4B-PH-K-R (8) (8) TCS DVSEL TCS_AN CN6 R348 NM
16/16
4
CRUM Control
VCC3
1 2 3 4
To DV Unit (To Analog Tonner Sensor)
(Red)
R335 10KJ
R334 NM
IC49
3.3V 5V
TP884 (CRUMSDA)
Vcc
(1) CRUMSDA
TP883
R337
0J
(5) 24V EN5V
/ASIC_RST
TP715
OE
GND
C348 0.1U
TC7SBD385AFU
R341 10KJ D34 D35
To DV Unit with CRUM (To Analog Tonner Sensor)

3
1
R279 10J KDS226 R280 300J (CRUMSDA) (CRUMSCL) R281 300J KDS226
3 2
3
1 3 5 7 9 2 4 6 8 10
CN7
EN5V
3.3V
(White)
TP887 (CRUMSCL)
C350
5V
B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
0.1U
5 1 4
IC51
(1)
CRUMSCL
2 3
TC7SET08F
FB8 FB10 FB14
2
F-GND 1
0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>
2
F-GND 3

0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608> FB11
F-GND 6
FB9
FB15
F-GND 2
F-GND 4
F-GND 7
FB12
1
1
F-GND 5
PGND
OPERATION PWB (LED/LCD section)

LCDDB7# LCDDB6# LCDDB5# LCDDB4# LCDE# LCDRS#
1/3
5V
1
LED_V1 LED301 C332 100p C327 100p C328 100p C329 100p 100p C330 100p C331 100p LED302 LED304 LED303 Q303 KRA225S
COPY
LTL-1LHG-002A Q304 KRA225S LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHEE-002A OPEN
CS1L
HPL
SJAL
5VEN
2 3
LED_V2 LED308 LED307 LED314 LED309
R344 100J
To LCD
IC301
2. OPERATION PWB
PRINT
LCDRS LCDDB[7..4] LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LCDE R333 R332 R331 R330 R329 100J R334
CS2L
SPFL
BPL
LCDCONT
R335
0J 100J LCDRS#
2 1
LED_V3 LED306 LED305 LED310
Q305 KRA225S
LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7
100J 100J 100J 100J
LCDE# LCDDB4# LCDDB5# LCDDB6# LCDDB7#
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0.1u 0.1u 0.1u
GND V5 VDD RS R/W E DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7

GPM181C0
SCAN
LTL-1LHG-002A TP13 TP14 LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A
FAX
RPL
R328 10kJ
D304 ZENER_3.3V C338 C333 C333
3
R325 0J R326 0J
TP12
R324 0J
TP3 TP2 TP1 DATA1 TP4
10
11
12
IC304 TB62725AF
/OUT0
/OUT1
/OUT2
/OUT3
/OUT4
/OUT5
/OUT6 R-EXT 15 1 GND
VCC
S-IN
CLOCK
/LATCH
/ENABLE
16
13
TP5 TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
TP9
TP10 TP10
C308
Open
KRC106S

14 S-OUT /OUT7
C323 open R306 OPEN C322 0.1u R305 0J 3.3V R327 820J 100J 100J PSL C305 1000p 1000p open C306 C307 R303 TP11 R304 100J R302
3.3V
5VEN
R323 10KJ
LED311
PSL
LTL-1LHG-002A Q307
OP-DATA OP-CLK
3 2
TP15
R301
470J
Q302
OP-LATCH
1
KRC106S
OPERATION PWB (KEY / Buzzer section)

5VEN
2/3
4
BZ301
4
1
D301
2
PS1720P02 1SS133 KEY321 KEY320 KEY322 KEY316 KEY306 KEY314 KEY312 R339 D302 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 10kJ KEY301
ESRT NM6K
NM2K
RAT
NM9K
RK
NM1K
SKQNABD010
MODK
SKQNABD010
Q306
1SS133 KEY325 KEY323 KEY318 KEY309 KEY315 KEY313
KEY311
KEY302
3
SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010
LK
D303
NM8K
CLK
NM0K
SHPK
ENT
NM4K
SKQNABD010
BPK
SKQNABD010
BZR
1SS133 KEY324 KEY319 KEY317 KEY308 KEY307
KEY305
KEY304
KEY303
KRC106S
MENU CAK
SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010
NM5K
NM3K
ASTK
EXP
SKQNABD010
NM7K
SKQNABD010
2SIDE
SKQNABD010
5V
IC303
16 VCC
TP19 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ TP16 1 TP17 2 TP18 3
KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 C321 0.1u
R338 R337 R336
A B C
C318
C319
C320
6 4 5 G1 G2A G2B GND

74HC238 F-KEYSC1 F-KEYSC2 F-KEYSC3
Open
Open
Open
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
TP20 TP21 TP22 TP23
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7
2
TP24
IC302
6 W Y 5
2
F-KEYIN1 F-KEYIN2 F-KEYIN3 F-KEYIN4 F-KEYIN5 F-KEYIN6 F-KEYIN7
2kJ
2kJ
2kJ
R346
R347
R348

33J TP25 5V
KEYIN
R318
5V
C315
16 VCC
C312 0.1u C337 Open TP34 TP35 TP36
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12
R314 R313 R312 R311 R307 R308 R309 R310
100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J
47pF
R342 2kJ
C335 Open
R341 2kJ
C334 Open
R340 2kJ
C313 Open
R319 2kJ
C314 Open
R320 2kJ
C316 Open
R321 2kJ
C317 Open
R322 2kJ
C336 Open
R343 2kJ
8 GND
74HC151 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ
A B C G
11 10 9 7
SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1
R317 R316 R315
C311
C310
C309
Open
Open
Open
KEY310
PSW
PSW SKQNABD010 C304 Open
OPERATION PWB (Connector section)
3/3
To MCU PWB
5V 5VEN
3.3V
C303 0.1u 47uF/16v 0.1u 47uF/16v 0.1u
C324
C302
C325
C301
C326
CN302
47uF/16v
To FAX Key PWB
TP37
To Drum Initial Detector
TP38
CN301
CN303 DRST
3
LCDDB[7..4]
TP39 TP40 TP41 TP42 TP43 TP44 TP45 TP46 TP47 TP48 TP49 TP50 TP51 TP52 TP53 SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 KEYIN KEYSC3 KEYSC2 KEYSC1 BZR LCDCONT LCDRS LCDE
1 2 3
S3B-PH-K-S
LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 DRST
TP54 PSL PSW OP-DATA OP-CLK BM15B-GHS-TBT OP-LATCH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
F-KEYSC3 F-KEYSC2 F-KEYSC1 F-KEYIN7 F-KEYIN6 F-KEYIN5 F-KEYIN4 F-KEYIN2 F-KEYIN3 F-KEYIN1 LED_V3 LED_V2 LED_V1 DATA1
TP55 TP56
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
TP57

B C D
R352
Open
32FMN-BMTTR-A-TB
DHAI-0519QSPZ 1 2 DRST D-GND
DHAI-0287QSZZ
DHAI-0517QSPZ
CN303 DRST
DHAI-0270QSZZ
PPD2
D-GND
1 2 3
LEDPPD2 PPD2 D-GND
1 2 3
1 2 3
DRST
AL MODEL ONLY
Thermistor
2 D-GND 2
CN11 1 LEDPPD2 2 PPD2 3 D-GND 4 RTH_IN 5 D-GND B5B-PH-K-S
Fan MT
DHAI-0543QSPZ
CN16 1 VFMOUT 2 FANLK 3 /VFMCNT 4 PGND B4B-PH-K-S
LCD_OPE PWB
FAX Model/FX13 Optional KIT only
(1) MCU section (1/3)
SHIFTER MT
1 2 3 4 5
CN27 24VSFTMT /SFTMT_0 /SFTMT_1 /SFTMT_2 /SFTMT_3
FAX_OPE PWB
DUPLEX MT
CN20 1 24VDupMT 2 /DMT_0 3 /DMT_1 4 /DMT_2 5 /DMT_3 B05B-XASK-1
CN3 D-GND BL INFOLED OP_LATCH D-GND OP_CLK OP_DATA PSW PSL DRST LCDD7 LCDD6 LCDD5 LCDD4 LCDE LCDRS LCDCONT BZR KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 KEYIN SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1 D-GND EN5V D-GND 5V D-GND VCC3 D-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 CN301 F-KEYSC3 F-KEYSC2 F-KEYSC1 F-KEYIN7 F-KEYIN6 F-KEYIN5 F-KEYIN4 F-KEYIN3 F-KEYIN2 F-KEYIN1 LED_V3 LED_V2 LED_V1 DATA1 D-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CN401 15 F-KEYSC3 14 F-KEYSC2 13 F-KEYSC1 12 F-KEYIN7 11 F-KEYIN6 10 F-KEYIN5 9 F-KEYIN4 8 F-KEYIN3 7 F-KEYIN2 6 F-KEYIN1 5 LED_V3 4 LED_V2 3 LED_V1 2 DATA1 1 D-GND 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN302 D-GND BL INFOLED OP_LATCH D-GND OP_CLK OP_DATA PSW PSL DRST LCDD7 LCDD6 LCDD5 LCDD4 LCDE LCDRS LCDCONT BZR KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 KEYIN SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1 D-GND EN5V D-GND 5V D-GND VCC3 D-GND
Duplex Model only

DHAI-0286QSZZ
SCANNER MT
POD
DHAI-0268QSZ4
CN26 1 LEDPOD 2 POD 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-S
CN22 OUTA+ 1 OUTB+ 2 OUTA3 OUTB4 B4B-PH-K-R
3. ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM
DHAI-0530QSP1
SCANNER Carriage UN
- HSYNC D-GND +5V D-GND - LDEN - VIDEO - S/H D-GND
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LD
DHAI-0529QSP1
CN42 1 /SYNC 2 D-GND 3 INT5V 4 D-GND 5 /LDEN 6 /VIDEO 7 SHOLD 8 D-GND B08B-CZHK-B
CCFL
CN2 AC VOUT GND VCL P-GND 1 2 1 3
24V P-GND /PMD PMRDY PMCLK_A 5 4 3 2 1
INVERTER PWB
CN3 AC VOUT GND 1 3
POLYGON MT
DHAI-0423QSZZ
CN41 1 24V 2 P-GND 3 /PMD 4 PMRDY 5 PMCLK_A B05B-CZHK-B
CCFL
CCD PWB
PD1
CN28 1 2 PD1 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-M
MCU PWB
DHAI-0516QSPZ CN7 5VEN (CRUMSDA) (CRUMSCL) D-GND 24V TCS DVSEL D-GND
FAX Model only

DHAI-0514QSPZ CN12 1 INT24V 2 PGND 3 /MMD 4 MMLD 5 /MMCLK B5B-PASK-1
CN4 P-GND 1 P-GND 2 VCL 3 VCL 4 12V 5 12V 6 EN5V 7 D-GND 8 (VSAMP) 9 CCD-TG 10 D-GND 11 CCD-RS 12 (BSAMP) 13 CCD-CP 14 (AFE_SDI) 15 CCD_PHI2 16 D-GND 17 CCD_PHI1 18 (AFE_SEN) 19 (ADCLK) 20 D-GND 21 (AFE_SCK) 22 (AFE_DB7) 23 mt_at_home 24 (AFE_DB5) 25 (AFE_DB6) 26 D-GND 27 (AFE_DB4) 28 (AFE_DB3) 29 (AFE_DB2) 30 31 (AFE_DB1) (AFE_DB0) 32 FF4-32-S15D5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 P-GND P-GND VCL VCL 12V 12V EN5V D-GND (VSAMP) CCD-TG D-GND CCD-RS (BSAMP) CCD-CP (AFE_SDI) CCD_PHI2 D-GND CCD_PHI1 (AFE_SEN) (ADCLK) D-GND (AFE_SCK) (AFE_DB7) MHPS (AFE_DB5) (AFE_DB6) D-GND (AFE_DB4) (AFE_DB3) (AFE_DB2) (AFE_DB1) (AFE_DB0)
INT24V PGND /MMD MMLD /MMCLK
1 2 3 4 5
MAIN MT
2 5VEN 4 (CRUMSDA) 3 (CRUMSCL) 1 P-GND P18-FX-4S-C
CRUM AR model only
TONER MT
CN25 1 TMA_O 2 TMB_O B2P-VH
2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 9 10 B10B-PHDSS-B
DHAI-0526QSPZ 1 2 6 5 8 24V TCS DVSEL D-GND BIAS 1 2 6 5 8

CN18 1 24V 2 /RRS 3 B3B-PH-K-E CN6 24V 1 TCS 2 DVSEL 3 D-GND 4 B4B-PH-K-R CN15 1 24V 2 /CPFS1 3 B3B-PH-K-S DHAI-0525QSPZ 1 2 BIAS F-GND MC DHAI-0269QSZZ 1 2
RESIST ROLLER SOLENOID
TCS
DV un
DHAI-0515QSPZ 1
CASSETTE PAPER SOLENOID
DHAI-0273QSZZ MCFB GRID 1 4
HVT PWB
DHAI-0292QSZZ TC 1
CED1
CED1 D-GND
CN21 1 CED1 2 D-GND 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INT5V INT24V P-GND P-GND /BIAS /TC /GRIDL /MC
DHAI-0267QSPZ BC 1
CN2 INT5V 1 INT24V 2 P-GND 3 P-GND 4 /BIAS 5 /TC 6 /GRIDL 7 /MC 8 B24B-PNDZS-1
DHAI-0289QSZZ
PPD1
CN24 1 LEDPPD1 2 PPD1 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-R
DHAI-0525QSPZ DHAI-0510QSP1 (for 100V area) DHAI-0536QSPZ (for 200V area) HLL HLN 1 2 3 1 2 HLL HLN 1 2
THERMOSTAT HL
DHAI-0511QSP1 (for 100V area) DHAI-0537QSPZ (for 200V area)
MPFS SOLENOID
CN14 1 24V 2 /MPFS 3 5 4 MFD 5 DGND B5B-PH-K-R DSW DHAI-0272QSZZ CN10 1 24V 2 24V1(DSWS) B2P-VH-R
POWER SUPPLY PWB

L N 1 2
For 120V area

AC-CORD
CN2 D-GND 9 P-GND 10 D-GND 11 3.3VIN 12 EN5V 13 3.3VIN 14 5V 15 /POFF 16 12VIN 17 18 24V FW 19 24V 20 /PR 21 HLOUT 22 P-GND 23 P-GND 24 B24B-PNDZS-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
D-GND P-GND D-GND 3.3VIN EN5V 3.3VIN 5V /POFF 12VIN 24V FW 24V /PR HLOUT P-GND P-GND
For 200V area

AC-INLET
AC-CORD
DHAI-0491QSZZ
(2) RSPF section (2/3)
DHAI-0533QSPZ 3 2 1 LED_SRJD D-GND SRJD LEDSRJD DGND SRJD 3 2 1 3 2 1
DHAI-0541QSPZ
SRJD
3 2 1 LED_SPPD D-GND SPPD DHAI-0540QSPZ
3 2 1
MCU PWB
3 2 1 LED_SPID D-GND SPID 1 2 24V _SPUS 1 2 24V SRVC LEDSCOD DGND SCOD 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 LEDSPPD DGND SPPD
SPPD
SCOD
DHAI-0539QSPZ 3 2 1 LEDSPID DGND SPID
CN30 LED_SRJD DGND SRJD LED_SPPD DGND SPPD LED_SCOD DGND SCOD LED_SPID DGND SPID 24VSPFSOL SPUS 24VSPFSOL SRVC SPMT_3 24VSPFMT SPMT_1 SPMT_0 24VSPFMT SPMT_2 24VSPFSOL NC 1 3 5 2 4 6 7 9 11 8 10 12 17 19 21 23 14 22 16 20 24 18 13 15
SPID
B24B-PNDZS-1
SPUS
RSPF UNIT
SRVC

1 2 3 4 5 6 /B COMB B A COMA /A
SPMT
DHAI-0306QSZZ
(3) 2nd cassette section (Optional)
CPFS2
2 1 /CPFS2 24V
2 1
PPD3
5V PPD3 D-GND
3 2 1
CN19 /CPFS2 24V 5V PPD3 D-GND PD2 D-GND CED2 D-GND
PD2
PD2 D-GND
1 2
AL 2nd cassette Model only
1 2 4 7 8 11 12 13 14 3 5 6 9 10
B14B-PHDSS-B
AR-D33 only
CED2 D-GND 1 2
MCU PWB
CED2

/CPFS2 24V 5V PPD3 D-GND PD2 D-GND CED2 D-GND FG DHAI-0442QSZZ 14 13 11 8 7 6 4 2 1 9 12 10 5 3 1 2 4 7 8 9 11 13 14 6 3 5 10 12
2nd CASSETTE UN
DHAI-0441QSZZ
AR 2nd cassette / AR-D33 Model only
FAX Model / FX13 Optional Model Only
DHAI-0538QSPZ CN3 1 BT1 2 LT1 B02B-PH-K-S
AL-2050CS/AL-2060 only
Speaker
DHAI-0518QSPZ
(4) Network box and FAX section (Optional)
NIC PWB MCU PWB
FAX Main PWB
To LAN
CN8 TX+ TXCT NC NC CT RX+ RXLeftLED_A LeftLED_K RightLED_A RightLED_K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CN1 D-GND DIR3 /IT3 /SELIN3 /AFFFD3 /STB /FLT SLCT PFRR PBSY /PACK P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 P0 /RESET VCC3 5V 5V D-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
CN39 1 D-GND 2 /REV 3 /INIT 4 /SLCTIN 5 /AUTOFD 6 /STB 7 /FAULT 8 SLCT 9 PE 10 BUSY 11 /ACK 12 PARAD7 13 PARAD6 14 PARAD5 15 PARAD4 16 PARAD3 17 PARAD2 18 PARAD1 19 PARAD0 20 /OA_RST 21 VCC3 22 EN5V 23 EN5V 24 D-GND 24FMN-BTK-A
MJ2 1 BT1 2 LT1 3 TEL1 4 TEL2 5 LT2 6 BT2
To TEL Communication Line
CN5 1 MODEM_IN 2 D-GND 3 MCU_D6 4 MCU_D7 5 MCU_D4 6 MCU_D5 7 MCU_D2 8 MCU_D3 9 MCU_D0 10 MCU_D1 11 MCU_nCS 12 /RD 13 PB_DATA7 14 MCU_INT 15 PB_DATA5 16 PB_DATA6 17 PB_DATA3 18 PB_DATA4 19 PB_DATA1 20 PB_DATA2 21 PB_ADDR7 22 PB_DATA0 23 PB_DATA5 24 PB_ADDR6 25 PB_ADDR3 26 PB_ADDR4 27 PB_ADDR1 28 PB_ADDR2 29 PB_NCS1 30 PB_ADDR0 31 PB_NWE 32 PB_NAE0 33 FAX_RST 34 PB_NOE 35 24V 36 MDM_IRQ 37 VCC3 38 EN5V 39 D-GND 40 P-GND 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 26 25 28 27 30 29 32 31 34 33 36 35 38 37 40 39 MJ1 1 NC 2 NC 3 L1 4 L2 5 NC 6 NC
CN2 MODEM_IN D-GND MCU_D6 MCU_D7 MCU_D4 MCU_D5 MCU_D2 MCU_D3 MCU_D0 MCU_D1 MCU_nCS /RD PB_DATA7 MCU_INT PB_DATA5 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA2 PB_ADDR7 PB_DATA0 PB_DATA5 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR2 PB_NCS1 PB_ADDR0 PB_NWE PB_NAE0 FAX_RST PB_NOE 24V MDM_IRQ VCC3 EN5V D-GND P-GND
To TEL Communication Line
USB Cable VBUS DD+ GND FG 1 2 3 4 5 CN9 1 2 3 4 5

CN1 5V DD+ GND FG
To LAN
CN8 TPTX+ TPTXTPRX+ NC NC TPRXNC NC ST_LED 5V LK_LED 5V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NW Box PWB
PJ1 VCC GND
2 3
AC adapter
1 2
L N
DHAI-0544QSPZ 1 2
CN3 1 L 3 N
POWER SUPPLY PWB
AR-NB2A Optional Model only
[15] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES

[Preparation]
Write the download data (extension .dwl) into the main unit. A USB port is required for the PC. Create "MaintenanceTool " flooder in the PC, and copy the following files to the folder.
2) Select "Option" "Serial Number Setting" on the menu bar.
Necessary for program download

Maintenance.exe ( Tool program) ProcModelQ.fmt ProcModelQ.mdl
Driver
Drivers/Vista/Mainte.inf (For Windows Vista) Drivers/2kXP/Mainte.inf (For Windows XP/2000) Drivers/Win9xME/Mainte.inf (For Windows Me/98SE) Drivers/Win9xME/UsbScan.sys (For Windows Me/98SE) 3) Set the serial number according to the following.
Download file
Download file (extension .dwl) Note: Copy the download data file (extension .dwl) to the folder in which the maintenance program is included. When making a folder for the maintenance tool in the PC, do not put a long folder name in the absolute path. [Example] Erroneous case: c:\Mainte nance Tool Download Proper case: c:\MaintenanceTool
1. Initial setting (Serial number setting procedures)

The serial number is set to the PC which is used for downloading. Setting is required once only, and there is no need to set again when rebooting the program. Note: This setting is required only when downloading the default data of E2PROM, and is not required when downloading firmware only. 1) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/ 5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu. (Only to set the serial number, the PC should not be connected to the machine.) Product Code (P): Enter number (0 99) Enter the product code of "3." ID Code(I): Enter number (0 99) Assign an individual code to each PC uses "Maintenance.exe." After completion setting, press [OK] key. 4) The serial number has been assigned.
2. Download procedures
1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect machine and the PC with a USB cable. (Connect it to the USB port on the main unit without fail. 3) PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/ 5420/M200/M201 series" in the Select Model menu.
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201 series
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201 series
AR-208S/208D
FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 1
4) PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed on the integration maintenance program. 5) PC side: When the integration maintenance program is boosted and "The copier is not turned on." is displayed at the bottom of display, select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar.
8) PC side: Specify the download file (*****.dwl) to be used.
9) PC side: When a download file is specified, downloading is performed automatically. 6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed in the "Special (MCU/ IMC2/Facsimile)" folder in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB connector is connected, and select "Reconnect" in procedure 5) again.)
10) PC side: When download is completed, the following message is displayed.
7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the main tree to develop its sub trees, and double-click "Download DWL Data Area" in the sub trees.
Note: Since, however, the machine enters the download data write state, do not turn OFF the power of the machine at this moment. 11) Main unit side: Wait until "DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!" is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel. When "DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!" is displayed, download is completed. Turn OFF the power of the machine, and disconnect the USB cable. 12) Terminate the integration maintenance program, and turn ON the machine again. Download is completed with the above procedures.
AR-208S/208D
Note: When another machine is connected, connect the USB cable again and select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar of the integration maintenance program. Repeat the above procedures from 5).
4) PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree on the integration maintenance program.
* Inhibition during download (Important)

If download is failed, the next download may not be executed. Use great care not to execute the following items during download. Never turn off the machine. Never disconnect the download cable (USB cable).
5) PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The copier is not turned on." is displayed, select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar.
* If the above inhibition item occurs during downloading, turn OFF/ON the power.
1) When "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation panel, execute the download procedure again. 2) If "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not displayed on the operation panel, turn OFF the power and press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (left key) and turn ON the power. Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation panel, and execute the download procedure again. If "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not still displayed, replace the MCU with a new one.
3. Version acquisition procedures

1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation panel of the main unit. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/ 5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu.
6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/ IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5).
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201 series
AR-208S/208D
7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the main tree items to develop its sub trees. Select "Get Version" in the sub trees.
4) PC side: Check that "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed in the integration maintenance program.
8) Check that the following display is shown.
5) PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The copier is not turned on." is displayed on the lower side of the display, select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar.
With the above procedures, version acquisition is completed. The display of "**.**" means its version is not downloaded. The downloaded versions are displayed in a version number as shown in "MCU Boot Version" and "MCU program Version". 6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/ IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5).
4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure

EEPROM data is acquired to the PC. Use this procedure as data maintenance of EEPROM. 1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation panel of the main unit. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/ 5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu.
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201 series
AR-208S/208D
7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" to develop its sub trees, and select "Upload EEPROM Data Area" in the sub trees.
5. Installing procedures
<USB integration maintenance program installation> Driver installation is made on plug-and-play. <Installation on Windows Vista> 1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "d" is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) The [Found New Hardware] display is shown as below. Select [Locate and install driver software (recommended)].
8) PC side: Enter a desired file name, and select "Save."
Note: A message to confirm the administrator of the computer is displayed. Press [Agree] button. 4) The [Found New Hardware - DOWNLOAD] display is shown. Click [I don't have the disc. Show me other options.].
9) PC side: When upload is completed, the complete message is displayed.
With the above procedure, the EEPROM data acquisition is completed. Data acquired by the EEPROM data acquisition procedure are saved in a file with extension of .eep.
AR-208S/208D
5) When the following display is shown, select [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].
8) The path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Maintenance.inf) is displayed. Press [Next] button.
6) The following display is shown.
9) When the following display is shown, select [Install this driver software anyway].
10) When the following display is shown, close [Close] button to complete installation. 7) Press [Browse] button, specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Maintenance.inf), and press [OK] button.
AR-208S/208D
<Installation on Windows XP> 1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) The following display is shown. Select [Install from a list or specific location] and press <Next> button.
5) Select the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) and press <OK> button. (Suppose that the driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.)
6) Check the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <Next> button.
4) Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver, press <Next> button to go to procedure 7).
7) When the following display is shown, press [Continue Anyway] button.
AR-208S/208D
8) When the following display is shown, installation is completed. Press <Finish> button.
5) Select [Specify a location] and press <Next> button.
With the above procedures, installation (on Windows XP) of the integration maintenance program is completed. <Installation on Windows 2000> 1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) Check that the Found New Hardware Wizard is displayed, and press <Next> button.
6) Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver, press <Next> button to go to procedure 9).
7) Specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <Open> button.
4) Select [Search for a suitable driver for my device] and press <Next> button.
AR-208S/208D
8) Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <OK> button. (Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.)
<Installation on Windows Me> 1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) The following display is shown on the PC side. Select [Specify the location of the driver], and press <Next> button.
9) Press <Next> button to start installation.
4) Select [Specify a location], specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) as the search location, and press <Next> button. If the search location does not include the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), press <Browse> button to specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf). (Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.)
11) Restart the PC. With the above procedures, installation (on Windows 2000) of the integration maintenance program is completed.
AR-208S/208D
5) Select the folder which includes maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <OK> button. (Suppose that the driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.)
6) Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <Next> button.
8) Restart the PC. With the above procedures, installation (on Windows ME) of the integration maintenance program is completed.
AR-208S/208D
Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder. The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder> Solder composition code (Refer to the table at the right.) Solder composition Sn-Ag-Cu Sn-Ag-Bi Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu Sn-Zn-Bi Sn-In-Ag-Bi Sn-Cu-Ni Sn-Ag-Sb Bi-Sn-Ag-P Bi-Sn-Ag Solder composition code a b z i n s p
Lead-Free
5mm
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread. Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident. Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the exclusive-use soldering iron is recommendable.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting point of lead-free solder is about 220C, which is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when completion of soldering is confirmed. Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently. If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron tip after completion of soldering work. If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT

(Danish) ADVARSEL ! Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. (English) Caution ! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturers instructions. (Finnish) VAROITUS Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (French) ATTENTION Il y a danger dexplosion s il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant. (Swedish) VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
(German) Achtung Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien. Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden. Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA) "BATTERY DISPOSAL" THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY (MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS. "TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGES" CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE MMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANSE) QUI DOIT TRE TRAITE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES INFORMATIONS SUR LES MTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT 2008 BY SHARP CORPORATION

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and ReaderTM are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries. IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation. All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION Digital Document System Group CS Promotion Center Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2008 January Printed in Japan

Ar 208d

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ar 208d

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

2. Note for servicing and handling

AR-208S AR-208D AR-208S AR-208D

Multi-bypass paper feed section

Tray paper feed section

Multi-bypass paper feed section

Resolution Type Voltage Power consumption

Power source Power consumption

Same size Same size

Original placement Original weight Mixed feeding Original which cannot

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

Life 80K (8K x 10Pcs) 250K (25K x 10Pcs) 25K

Product name AR-208MT (A4 6% document) AR-208MD

Drum Drum fixing plate

Supply storage condition

Normal operating condition

Temperature: 20C to 25C Humidity: 65 5%RH

Acceptable operating condition

3. Production control number (lot No.) identification

AR-208S/208D CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1

Production control label attachment position

Production control label attachment position(*1)

1 The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of a

4. Toner cartridge replacement

AR-208S/208D CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2

[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

Front cover Transfer charger

Side cover Charger cleaner

Fusing unit release lever

AR-208S/208D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 1

Shows the current copy ratio.

AR-208S/208D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 2

4. Motors, solenoids and clutch

AR-208S/208D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 3

5. Sensors and switches

10 Upper door open/close sensor 11 Paper sensor

AR-208S/208D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 4

AR-208S/208D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 5

7. Cross sectional view

AR-208S/208D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 6

[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

exposed to direct sunlight

3. Checking packed components and accessories

Drum cartridge (installed in unit)

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 1

6. Developer unit installation

5. Removing protective packing materials

2) Release the scan head locking switch.

Protective pins CAUTION tape

7. Toner cartridge installation

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 3

8. Loading the paper tray

Pressure plate lock

Paper guide (B) Paper guide (A)

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 4

B. Installing the software

Installation environment and usable software

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 5

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 6

(2) Using the machine as a shared printer

(1) Connecting a USB cable